Manual de Serviço BC-5380

BC-5380 / BC-5180
Auto Hematology Analyzer
Service Manual
© 2008-2020 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Operator’s Manual, the issue date is 2020-01.
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This
manual may refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any
license under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.

Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other

derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in

China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable
for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product,
only if:
 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this

product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements; and
 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
I
WARNING
 It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to
carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in
machine breakdown or personal injury.
 Be sure to operate the analyzer under the situation specified in this manual;
otherwise, the analyzer will not work normally and the analysis results will be
unreliable, which would damage the analyzer components and cause personal
injury.
NOTE
 This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or
other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting
from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not
approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or

unauthorized service people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Service Contact
Company Name: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Company Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan, Shenzhen, 518057, P. R. China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mindray.com
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
III
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................1
1 Using This Manual..................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Scope ...................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 Conventions Used in This Manual ........................................................................... 1-1
1.4 Symbols ................................................................................................................... 1-2
2 Product Specification ............................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Equipment Name ..................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Intended Use ........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4 Specified reagents and reagent volume of the product ........................................... 2-2
2.5 Sample Volume ....................................................................................................... 2-2
2.6 Throughput .............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.7 Measurement Mode................................................................................................. 2-2
2.8 Sample Types .......................................................................................................... 2-3
2.9 Sampling Mode........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.10 Autoloader ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.11 Tube Specification ................................................................................................... 2-3
2.12 Operation Mode ....................................................................................................... 2-3
2.13 Parameter ................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.14 Performance Requirements .................................................................................... 2-7
3 Software System ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.2 Password Function .................................................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Analyzer Software Upgrade .................................................................................... 3-1
3.4 Software Installation and Upgrade .......................................................................... 3-4
3.5 Connection Setup of the IPU and Analyzer ........................................................... 3-10
3.6 LIS Setup and Connection .....................................................................................3-11
4 Main Parameters Description................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Parameter Source ................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 WBC Measurement ................................................................................................. 4-3
4.3 HGB Measurement .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.4 RBC/PLT Measurement ........................................................................................... 4-5
4.5 Time counting method ............................................................................................. 4-6
4.6 Parameter Flag Message Information ..................................................................... 4-7
5 Error Information of the Analyzer ............................................................................ 5-1
5.1 Error Code ............................................................................................................... 5-1
1
Table of Contents
6 Fluidic System ........................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Analysis Flow ........................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Sample Volume ....................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Temperature Control of the Fluidic System ............................................................. 6-5
6.4 Reagent Volume ...................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5 Introduction of Fluidic Components ......................................................................... 6-5
6.6 Introduction of Fluidic Structure ............................................................................. 6-16
6.7 Introduction of Sequences ..................................................................................... 6-20
6.8 Function of Fluidic Valves ...................................................................................... 6-53
7 Optical System .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Overview of Optical System Principle ..................................................................... 7-1

7.2 Optical Path and Workflow of the Optical System ................................................... 7-1
7.3 Components of the Optical System ......................................................................... 7-3
7.4 Optical System Status Determination ...................................................................... 7-3
7.5 Maintenance and Replacement of the Optical System ........................................... 7-5
7.6 Optical System Gain Calibration ........................................................................... 7-10
8 Hardware System ...................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 8-1

8.2 Diagram of Hardware System ................................................................................. 8-1
8.3 Analog Board ........................................................................................................... 8-2
8.4 Digital Control Board (including CPU module) ........................................................ 8-9
8.5 Drive Board .............................................................................................................8-11
8.6 Autoloading Board ................................................................................................. 8-17
8.7 Laser Control Board .............................................................................................. 8-22
8.8 Preamplification Board .......................................................................................... 8-26
8.9 Power Board .......................................................................................................... 8-29
8.10 Fluid Detection Board ............................................................................................ 8-35
8.11 Indicator Board ...................................................................................................... 8-38
8.12 Key Board .............................................................................................................. 8-40
8.13 Mini Network Board ............................................................................................... 8-41
8.14 List of Prefixes of Board Sockets .......................................................................... 8-43
8.15 Connections Lines and Boards ............................................................................. 8-44
8.16 Motors, Photocouplers and Micro-switches .......................................................... 8-48
8.17 Analyzer Status Indicated by the Indicators .......................................................... 8-51
9 Mechanical System ................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Analyzer Structure ................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2 Appearance ............................................................................................................. 9-1
9.3 Layout Introduction .................................................................................................. 9-3
9.4 Autoloading Assembly ............................................................................................. 9-7
9.5 Mixing Assembly .................................................................................................... 9-17
9.6 Sampling Assembly ............................................................................................... 9-19
9.7 Replace the Syringe Assembly.............................................................................. 9-27
2
Table of Contents
9.8 Debug Screen Introduction .................................................................................... 9-32

9.9 Adjusting the Position of the Sample Probe .......................................................... 9-33
9.10 Adjusting the Clamp Position ................................................................................ 9-36
9.11 Adjusting Built-in Barcode Scanner ....................................................................... 9-40
9.12 HGB Assembly Replacement ................................................................................ 9-41
3
1 Using This Manual
 Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

manual and the operator's manuals.
1.1 Scope
To use this manual effectively, you need the following capabilities:
 Comprehensive knowledge of circuit and fluidics;
 Comprehensive knowledge of reagents;
 Comprehensive knowledge of controls;
 Comprehensive knowledge of troubleshooting;
 Mastering the way to operate this analyzer;
 Mastering the way to operate this analyzer;
 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope;
 Reading pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology.
1.2 Introduction
This manual comprises 9 chapters. Refer to the table below to find the information you need.
1.3 Conventions Used in This Manual

When you read … It means …
To press the desired item lightly with your finger; or to left-CLICK

Click
it with the mouse.
To CLICK the desired edit box and use the external keyboard or
ENTER the pop-up keyboard to enter the desired characters or digits; or
to scan the number by using the bar-code scanner.
to move the cursor to the character or digit that you want to delete
DELETE
by clicking the left button of the mouse or using
1-1
Using This Manual
When you read … It means …
[←][→][Home][End], and then delete the character after the
cursor by pressing [Del], or delete the character before the cursor
by pressing [BackSpace] ([←] on the upper right part of the soft
keyboard).
to CLICK the arrow buttons at the ends of the scroll bar; or to

CLICK and hold the mouse button down while dragging the scroll
DRAG SCROLL
bar until the desired information is displayed; or to touch the scroll
BAR
bar and rest your finger there until the desired information is
displayed.
to CLICK the down arrow button of the desired box to display the
SELECT from ×× pull-down list, (and DRAG SCROLL BAR) to browse and then
pull-down list CLICK the desired item; or to press the keys
(for pull-down list) ([↑][↓][PageUp][PageDown]) to browse the current list and press
[ENTER] to select the desired item.
1.4 Symbols
You will find the following symbols in this manual.
When you see… Then…
read the statement below the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personnel injury.
alerting you to a possibility of analyzer damage or unreliable
analysis results.
alerting you to information that requires your attention.
alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
1-2
Using This Manual
You may find the following symbols on the analyzer, reagents, controls or calibrators.
When you see… It means…

Note: suggesting the users consult to
accompanying documents to get important
safety information.
BIOLOGICAL RISK
CAUTION, RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
WARNING, LASER BEAM
CAUTION, HOT SURFACE
PROTECTIVE EARTH (GROUND)
EARTH (GROUND)
ALTERNATING CURRENT
FOR IN VITRO DIAGNOSTIC USE
BATCH CODE
USE BY (YYYY-MM-DD)
SERIAL NUMBER
DATE OF MANUFACTURE
1-3
Using This Manual
When you see… It means…

MANUFACTURER
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
CONSULT INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Be sure to observe the following precautions for the safety of patients and operators when
you are servicing the analyzer.
 It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to

carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in
machine breakdown or harm to human health.
 Never use combustible gas (e.g. anesthetic) or combustible liquid (e.g.

ethanol) around the analyzer. Otherwise, the risk of explosion may exist.
 When servicing the analyzer, be sure to turn off the power. Servicing the
analyzer when it is on may bring risk of electric shock or damage to electronic
components.
 Connect the analyzer to a socket having sole fuse and protective switch. Do
not use the same fuse and protective switch with other equipment (e.g. life
supporting equipment). Otherwise, the equipment failure, over current or
impulse current that occurs at the startup moment may lead to tripping.
 To prevent personal injury during maintenance, keep your clothes, hairs and
hands from the moving parts, such as sample probe, clipper and piercer.
 Possible mechanical movement of the warned position may lead to personal

injury during the normal operation, removal and maintenance.
 Be sure to dispose of reagents, waste, samples, consumables, etc. according

to government regulations.
 The reagents are irritating to eyes, skin and mucosa. Wear proper personal
protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory
procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
 If the reagents accidentally spill on your skin, wash them off with plenty of
water and if necessary, go see a doctor; if the reagents accidentally spill into
your eyes, wash them off with plenty of water and immediately go see a
1-4
Using This Manual
doctor.
 Improper maintenance may damage the analyzer. Maintain the analyzer strictly
as instructed by the service manual and inspect the analyzer carefully after the
maintenance.
 For problems not mentioned in the service manual, contact Mindray customer
service department for maintenance advice.
 To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment components, remove

metal jewelry before maintaining or servicing electronic components of the
equipment.
 Electrostatic discharge may damage electronic components. If there is a

possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then do that procedure at an ESD
workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap.
 This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained medical professionals.
 Samples, controls, calibrators and waste are potentially infectious. Wear

proper personal protective equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow
safe laboratory procedures when handling them in the laboratory.
 All the analyzer components and surfaces are potentially infectious. Take
proper protective measures for operation or maintenance.
 The sample probe tip is sharp and may contain biohazardous materials.
Exercise caution to avoid contact with the probe when working around it.
1-5
2 Product Specification
2.1 Equipment Name
Name: Auto Hematology Analyzer
Models: BC-5380, BC-5180
2.2 Intended Use

The BC-5380 and BC-5180 is a quantitative, automated hematology analyzer and 5-part
differential counter used in clinical laboratories.
The purpose of this analyzer is to identify the normal patient, with all normal
system-generated parameters, and to flag or identify patient results that require additional
studies.
Scope: for in-vitro diagnostic and scientific research and application;
Operation environment: well-managed clinical laboratory, not used as portable device;
Operators: This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
2.3 Product Overview

BC-5380 and BC-5180 are the autoloading models of the low-end hematology analyzer.
As the widespread model, it provide the functions of WBC, RBC and PLT measurements
and WBC 5 differential with 27 parameters which are divided into 3 types (WBC, RBC and
PLT), there are 4 RUO parameters for the WBC parameters. The 27 parameters are
directly measured parameters and parameters calculated indirectly. WBC diff is realized
by Flow Cytometry by Laser (which is dyed by chemical reagents and laser scattered
method) , Electrical Impedance Method, the WBC is gained by Electrical Impedance
Method; RBC, HCT and PLT count are gained by Electrical, HGB is gained by Colorimetric
Method, and other parameters are gained by calculation.
BC-5380 and BC-5180 use external PC computer, only the [Open] key and [Run] key are set
on the device for interaction between people and device, while other operation required to be
performed by the keyboard. The device has basic measurement and analysis function and can
be connected to the hospital test department by the PC, printer and barcode scanner interface
are also offered.
The whole system is formed by BC-5380 and BC-5180 and specified reagents, reagents,
controls and calibrators.
2-1
Product Specification
2.4 Specified reagents and reagent volume of the

product
It is recommended to use specified reagents by Mindray, which include 4 testing reagents

and 2 maintenance reagents. The specified controls and calibrators are as table 2
Table 2-1 Specified reagent, control and the volume
Volume used for single sample

composition
CBC+DIFF CBC
M-53 DILUENT M-53D DILUENT ≤ 45mL ≤ 34mL
M-53LEO(I) LYSE 0
M-53 LYSE M-53LEO(II) LYSE ≤ 2.5mL 0
M-53LH LYSE ≤ 1.0mL
PROBE CLEANSER M-53P PROBE CLEANSER /
RD(BC-5D)
Control /
Mindray(B55)
RD(SC-CAL PLUS)
Calibrator /
Mindray(S50)
Note: the single diluent consumable under the predilute mode includes the diluent volume for
dispensing the diluent.
2.5 Sample Volume

The two measurements under whole blood mode require no more than 20ul;(When using the
vacuum tube, the minimum required testing blood is1.0mL);
The two measurements under predilute blood mode require no more than 20ul .
2.6 Throughput
Throughput under the autoloading mode: no less than 60 samples/hour;
Throughput under the close-tube mode: no less than 50 samples/hour.
2.7 Measurement Mode

Measurement Mode CBC, CBC+DIFF。
2-2
2.8 Sample Types

Two sample types: whole blood and predilute blood.
Two measurement types can be used under two sample types.
2.9 Sampling Mode

Autoloading (only whole blood mode), close tube.
2.10 Autoloader
The autoloader shall contain no less than 30 samples and offers auto barcode reading
function.
During the counting under the autoloading mode, STAT is allowed to be inserted.
2.11 Tube Specification

1. Closed-tube specification
The tube of the following specification can be used for the closed-tube testing:
Ф13X75 (mm) (without the cap) evacuated blood collection tube, used for whole blood mode;
Note: the cap of evacuated blood collection tube cannot be higher than 83mm.
Ф11X40mm (1.5ml centrifugal tube), used for predilute mode.
2. Specification of the autoloading tube
Tube specification under closed-tube whole blood mode is also applicable to the
autoloading mode.
2.12 Operation Mode

Operations are performed by using the device key which includes the switch, [Run] key and
[Open] key and external keyboard.
The run sequence and rules of the connection between analyzer and external PC
The following two operations can be performed without considering the sequence, the
analyzer and PC are not required to be preconnected, and the analyzer and PC can
perform the following operations independently:
The startup and shutdown of the analyzer;
Start up the PC and software;
Only in the following condition the analyzer is powered on (Startup refers power on,
2-3
initialization and normal count status): power on the analyzer, startup the software, input
correct user name and password successfully and the software and analyzer can
communicate normally.
2.13 Parameter
1. Parameter classification
Measure the WBC, RBC, PLT and HGB of the blood and output 27 Parameters, 3
histogram and 1scattergram, two measurement types CBC and CBC+DIF are offered
as follows:
Table 2-2 Parameter description
CBC +
Clone Name Abbreviation CBC
DIFF
White Blood Cell count WBC * *
Basophils number Bas# / *
Leukon 15 parameters)
Basophils percentage Bas% / *

Neutrophils number Neu# / *
（
Neutrophils percentage Neu% / *
Eosinophils number Eos# / *
Eosinophils percentage Eos% / *
Lymphocytes number Lym# / *
Lymphocytes percentage Lym% / *
，
include 4 RUO parameters
Monocytes number Mon# / *

Monocytes percentage Mon% / *
Abnormal Lymphocytes number ALY# / *
Abnormal Lymphocytes percentage ALY% / *
Large Immature Cells number LIC# / *
Large Immature Cells percentage LIC% / *
Red Blood Cell count RBC * *

RBC-related 8 parameters)
Hemoglobin Concentration HGB * *

Mean Corpuscular Volume MCV * *
Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin MCH * *
（ Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin Concentration MCHC * *
Red Blood Cell Distribution Width - Coefficient of RDW-CV * *
Variation
Red Blood Cell Distribution Width - Standard RDW-SD * *
Deviation
Hematocrit HCT * *
2-4
CBC +
Clone Name Abbreviation CBC
DIFF
PLT-Related(4 Platelet count PLT * *
parameters)
Mean Platelet Volume MPV * *

Platelet Distribution Width PDW * *
Plateletcrit PCT * *
“*” means that parameters are tested under the mode; “/” means that parameters are not
offered under the mode.
Table 2-3 Histogram description
Name Abbreviation CBC CBC + DIFF

White Blood Cell/ WBC/BASO / *
Basophils Histogram Histogram
White Blood Cell WBC Histogram * /
Histogram
Red Blood Cell Histogram RBC Histogram * *
Platelet Histogram PLT Histogram * *
CBC mode: corresponding histograms include WBC Histogram, RBC Histogram and PLT
Histogram;
CBC＋DIFF mode: Corresponding histograms include WBC/BASO Histogram, RBC
Histogram and PLT Histogram.
Table 2-4 Scattergram description
Name Abbreviation CBC CBC + DIFF

Differential Scattergram Diff Scattergram / *
2. Parameter unit and format
Table 2-5 Parameter unit and format
Parameter Format Unit Parameter Format Unit
WBC
Lym%
Lym#
Mon%
Mon# ***.** 109/L
Bas%
Bas# ***.** 103/uL **.* ％
Eos%
Eos# ****.* 102/uL .***
Neu%
Neu# ***.** /nL
ALY%
ALY#
LIC%
LIC#
RBC **.** 1012/L PLT **** 109/L
2-5
Parameter Format Unit Parameter Format Unit
**.** 106/uL **** 103/uL

**** 104/uL ***.* 104/uL
**.** /pL **** /nL
*** g/L **** g/L

HGB **.* g/dL MCHC ***.* g/dL
**.* mmol/L ***.* mmol/L
***.* pg
***.* fL
MCV MCH **.** fmol
***.* um3
**** amol
**.* % ***.* fL
RDW-CV RDW-SD
.*** ***.* um3
**.* %
**.* fL
HCT .*** L/L MPV
**.* um3
.*** None
None
.*** %
PDW **.* （ 10 PCT
*.** mL/L
GSD)
Note: Fast setup function of the units in different country mentioned in table 8 is provided;
users can set them by passwords. Customization functions are also offered. When there are
many units to be selected, user can customize all the units by the password. The setup of
some parameters unit is correlated.
Table 2-6 units in different country
International SI America Canada

Parameter Format Unit Format Unit Format Unit
WBC ***.** × 109/L ***.** × 103/µ L ***.** × 109/L
RBC **.** × 1012/L **.** × 106/µ L **.** × 1012/L
HGB *** g/L **.* g/dL *** g/L
HCT .*** **.* % .*** L/L
MCV ***.* fL ***.* fL ***.* fL
MCH ***.* pg ***.* pg ***.* pg
MCHC **** g/L ***.* g/dL **** g/L
PLT **** × 109/L **** × 103/µ L **** × 109/L
Lym% .*** **.* % .***
Lym# ***.** × 109/L ***.** × 103/µ L ***.** × 109/L
RDW-SD ***.* fL ***.* fL ***.* fL
RDW-CV .*** **.* % .***
MPV **.* fL **.* fL **.* fL
2-6
International SI America Canada

Parameter Format Unit Format Unit Format Unit
None None None
**.* **.* **.*
PDW (10GSD) (10GSD) (10GSD)
PCT *.** mL/L . *** % . *** %
Holland England Domestic Holland

Unit Format Unit Unit Format Unit Unit
WBC ***.** × 109/L ***.** × 109/L ***.** × 109/L
RBC **.** × 1012/L **.** × 1012/L **.** × 1012/L
HGB **.* mmol/L **.* g/dL *** g/L
HCT .*** L/L .*** **.* %
MCV ***.* fL ***.* fL ***.* fL
MCH **** amol ***.* pg ***.* pg
MCHC ***.* mmol/L ***.* g/dL **** g/L
PLT **** × 109/L **** × 109/L **** × 109/L
Lym% .*** **.* % **.* %
Lym# ***.** × 109/L ***.** × 109/L ***.** × 109/L
RDW-SD ***.* fL ***.* fL ***.* fL
RDW-CV .*** **.* % **.* %
MPV **.* fL **.* fL **.* fL
None None None
PDW **.* **.* **.*
(10GSD) (10GSD) (10GSD)
PCT *.** mL/L *.** mL/L . *** %
2.14 Performance Requirements

Before the verification of each item, check if the background test meets the requirements.
2.14.1 Background Requirements
Table 2-7 Background Requirements
Parameter Background Requirements

WBC ≤ 0.3  109 / L
RBC ≤ 0.03 1012/ L
HGB ≤1g/L
HCT ≤ 0.5 %
PLT ≤ 10  109 / L
The Background Requirements are applicable to whole blood and predilute blood.
Background verification: Run the diluent as samples for 3 times, take the maximum value as
the background result
2-7
2.14.2 Requirements of Carryover

Carryover means the carryover extent of the low concentrated sample from the high
concentrated sample.
Verification method:
Domestic: take high value samples within the range of table 12 (high value control centrifuged
or specified high value linear control), test 3 times consecutively, the value are i1,i2 and i3; and
then take low value samples within the range of table 12(the low control is diluent for 10
times)，test 3 times consecutively, the value are j1，j2，j3, calculate the carryover with the
following formula, it shall meet the requirements of table 11.
International: take high value samples within the range of table 12,mix them well and test 3
times consecutively, the value are i1，i2，i3; take diluent as low value sample, test 3 times
consecutively, the value are j1，j2，j3, calculate the carryover with the following formula, it shall
meet the requirements of table 11.
Table 2-8 Carryover
Parameter Carryover
WBC ≤0.5％
RBC ≤0.5％
HGB ≤0.6％
HCT ≤0.5％
PLT ≤1.0％
Table 2-9 concentration range of test sample of the carryover
Parameter high value range low value range

WBC > 15.00×109/L < 3.00×109/L
RBC > 6.00×1012/L < 2.00×1012/L
HGB > 200 g/L < 40 g/L
HCT >54.0% <18.0%
PLT > 300×109/L < 100×109/L
2.14.3 Reproducibility Requirements

Domestic: Take a sample within the following range, test for 10 times consecutively, and
calculate the (CV，%) or (d) with the formula.
International: Take a sample within the following range, test for 11 times consecutively,
take to results of 2-11 results to calculate the (CV，%) or (d) with the formula.
2-8
in the formula：
s ---- Standard deviation of the sample test;
x ---- mean of the sample test;
xi
---- Test value of the sample;
d ---- Absolute deviation of the sample test value.
Table 2-10 Reproducibility requirements
Whole blood Predilute

Parameter Test range （CV/ Absolute （CV/ Absolute
deviation d) deviation d)
WBC 4.00×109/L～15.00 109 / L ≤2.0％ ≤4.0％
Neu% 50.0％～60.0％ ±4.0(d) ±8.0(d)
Lym% 25.0％～35.0％ ±3.0(d) ±6.0(d)
Mon% 5.0%～10.0％ ±2.0(d) ±4.0(d)
Eos% 2.0％～5.0％ ±1.5(d) ±2.5(d)
Bas% 0.5％～1.5％ ±0.8(d) ±1.2(d)
RBC 3.50  1012 / L ~ 6.00  1012 / L ≤1.5% ≤3.0%
HGB 110 g/L ~ 180 g/L ≤1.5% ≤3.0%
MCV 70 fL～120 fL ≤1.0% ≤2.0%
PLT 150  109 / L ~ 500  109 / L ≤4.0% ≤8.0%
MPV / ≤4.0% ≤8.0%
2.14.4 Linearity Requirements

Under whole blood and predilute mode, prepare samples of different concentration and
test them in order, calculate the slope and intercept with linearity equation and gain the
theory value, get the deviation between the theory value and test value, it shall meet the
following requirements.
2-9
Table 2-11 Linearity requirements
Linearity deviation Linearity deviation

Parameter Linearity range
(Linearity deviation) (Predilute Mode )
WBC 0.00×109/L ～ ±0.30×109/L or ±5％ ±0.60×109/L or ±6％

99.99×109/L
RBC 0.00×1012/L ～ ±0.05×1012/L or ±5％ ±0.10×1012/L or ±10％
8.00×1012/L
HGB 0 g/L～250g/L ±2g/L or ±2％ ±4g/L or ±4％
PLT 0×109/L～1000×109/L ±10×109/L or ±8％ ±20×109/L or ±16％

（RBC≤7.0)
HCT 0%~67% ±2%(HCT) or ±3% ±4%(HCT) or ±6%

(error percentage) (error percentage )
2.14.5 Display range of the main parameters
Table 2-12 Linearity Requirements
Parameter Linearity range Display range
WBC 0.00～99.99×109/L 0～200.0×109/L
RBC 0.00～8.00×1012/L 0～18.00×1012/L
HGB 0～250g/L 0～300g/L
PLT 0～1000×109/L 0～2000×109/L
HCT 0~67% 0%~80%
2.14.6 Correlation Requirements to the Compare Device

2.14.6.1Correlation requirements to the compare device
Select a high end 5-diff analyzer to perform correlation evaluation. The compare analyzer and
the BC-5380 or BC-5180 shall be calibrated before the correlation evaluation and count the
regression equation. In the statistical analysis, pick out the samples which the accuracy will be
influenced by the principle, such as microcytes, existed nucleated red blood cell and so on. In
the statistical regression equation: Y ＝ aX + b; count the correlation coefficient r.
2-10
Table 2-13 Correlation requirements of the whole blood count
Parameter r
WBC ≥ 0.99
RBC ≥ 0.99
HGB ≥ 0.98
MCV ≥ 0.98
PLT ≥ 0.95
Correlation analysis and regression calculation：
n is sample quantity
Regression equation: Y=aX+b，meanwhile:
n 2
  ( Xij  X )(Yij  Y )
i 1 j 1
a
n 2 2
  ( Xij  X )
i 1 j 1
b  Y  a X ; n is sample quantity
2.14.7 Correlation and Accuracy Requirements of the WBC
Differential Parameters
2.14.7.1Correlation requirements
Select 100 normal samples and 100 abnormal samples to perform correlation test with CLSI
reference method (H20, microscope method), take the mean and analyzer results to perform
correlation analysis.
In the equation of linear regression, pick out the sample whose accuracy is restricted by
the principle. In equation of linear regression: Y ＝ aX + b; Calculate the correlation
coefficient r, which shall meet the following requirements. Calibrate the analyzer before
performing the correlation test.
2-11
Table 2-14 correlation requirements of the whole blood differential
correlation coefficient r to the manually

Parameter
differential
Neutrophils (Neu%) ≥0.90
Lymphocytes (Lym%) ≥0.90
Monocyte (Mon%) ≥0.75
Eosinophils (Eos%) ≥0.80
Basophils (Bas%) ≥0.50
2.14.7.2Accuracy requirements
Select 20 samples tested with manual differentiate correlation at random,using the 99%
trustable range calculation method to gain the trastable range of manual differentiate range.
Compare the mean of results tested by the device with the trustable range,within the range of
≥99% of the trustable range lower limit or≤99% of the upeer limint are judged as qualified,
those who are out of the range are judeged as unqualified.
1. Calculating standard deviation

pq
Equation: SEp＝
n
In the equation, n=200; p= mean obtained with the reference method; q=100-p; when freedom
is 199, the t distribution factor of 99％ credibility limit =2.57.
2.Calculating credibility range
The 99％ credibility range of a parameter rate: p±2.57×SEp.
3.Requirement
The Lym%, Neu%, Mon%, Eos% and Bas% results tested by the analyzer must be within the
99％ credibility range of the results tested by the reference method.
2.14.8 Identification Capability of the Abnormal Samples

Microscopic Exam. Positive ： 1.Obvious Anisocytosis (the size double or more), RBC
hypochromic (refers to >1/2 RBC hypochromic)>30%; 2. giant platelet (number /whole film or
count 200 WBC)>5; 3. Platelet clumps (Cluster/whole film)>5 ； 4.Dohle body
granulocyte >10% ； 5. Toxic granulation neutrophil>10%; 6. granulocyte with vacuolar
degeneration >10%；7. Blasts (myeloblast, monoblast or blast lymphocyte, Premonocytes or
prolymphocyte)≥1%; 8. Total sum of myelocyte and more immature granulocyte≥1%；9. Sum
total of metamyelocyte and more immature granulocyte >2%; 10. Band form granulocyte>5%,
11. Abnormal Lymphocyte (include Atypical Lymphocyte)>5% ； 12.NRBC≥1% ； 13.
plasmocyte≥1%.
2-12
Analyzer positive: one or more flags of the analyzer are positive.
Table 2-15 Definition of the abnormal samples
Analyzer result
Microscopic exam result positive negative
positive TP (True Positive) FN （false negative)
Negative FP (false positive) TN (True Negative)
false positive flagging rate ＝ FP /（TN + FP) *100%
false negative flagging rate ＝ FN /（FN + TP) *100%
Capability requirements to identify the abnormal samples: analyze the differentiate results of
the analyzer and microscope exam. results,, false negative < 15%; false positive < 20%。
2-13
3 Software System
3.1 Overview
The software system is consisted of the analyzer software and the PC operation software -
IPU. The analyzer software runs in the analyzer CF card, the operation software IPU runs in
the Windows 7 Home Basic*32, Windows 7 Ultimate*32, Windows 7 Ultimate*64, Windows
8 Professional*32, Windows 8 Professional*64, Windows 8 Standard*32 and Windows 8
Standard*64 systems. The analyzer software analyzes sequences, collects and reads data;
while the IPU saves, displays and prints results, displays analysis and QC data, and realizes
data management, parameter setup and communication.
3.2 Password Function

There are 3 levels of passwords, general user, administrator and service engineer. The
administrator can access all functions of the general user, and the service engineer can
access all functions of the administrator. User name and password of the IPU:
Level User name Password

Service engineer service Se s700
3.3 Analyzer Software Upgrade

The installation & upgrade package shall be decompressed first. The package contains IPU
installation package, analyzer upgrade package and installation & upgrade instructions.
1. Upgrade package
Decompress the upgrade package, you will have:
Figure 3-1 Analyzer software upgrade package
The installation packages of open vial and closed tube models are consolidated into one.
2. Upgrade procedure
Start the upgrade tool:
3-1
Software System
Figure 3-2 Analyzer upgrade software menu
Select "Analyzer Upgrade"
Figure 3-3 Analyzer upgrade confirmation screen
Logon: only user of service access level or above may perform analyzer upgrade.
3-2
Software System
Figure 3-4 Analyzer upgrade software logon screen
Select upgrade file: the upgrade directory
Figure 3-5 Select upgrade file
After uploading, the upgrade process starts. If the kernel is upgraded, the above steps shall
be repeated to complete upgrade.
Kernel upgrade done.
Repeat the above steps to upgrade again.
When the process completes, restart the analyzer to complete upgrade.
Figure 3-6 Upgrade done
Upgrade duration: Complete upgrade of the analyzer software requires 5～8 minutes.
3-3
Software System
NOTE
 Do not disconnect power of the analyzer during the upgrade process, even if
the process bar stays still for a while, or the upgrade may fail or the analyzer
cannot be started.
 Close the IPU before upgrade. The IPU shall be closed during analyzer
upgrade process.
 Power off the analyzer when prompt message instructs you so. Start up the
analyzer 2 minutes later after the shutdown to continue with the upgrade.
 If the upgrade fails, repeat the upgrade procedure again.
 Ensure the completeness of the upgrade package, do not modify any file in the
package.
 Keep anti-virus software and fire wall closed throughout the upgrade process.
3. Handling upgrade failure

Upgrade failed and insufficient disk space is reported, check the disk space.
If the upgrade fails, repeat the upgrade procedure again.
Ensure the completeness of the upgrade package, do not modify any file in the package.
3.4 Software Installation and Upgrade
3.4.1 PC Configuration
Hardware configuration Software configuration
CPU: Intel® 1.6GHz/AMD® 3.5GHz and Operation system:
above Windows 10 Home 64bit
RAM: ≥ 1 G Database: SQLite
Hard disk space: ≥ 128 G

At least 2 network adapters
3.4.2 Hard disk partition

Recommended hard disk partition:
Disk C ≥40G System disk For installation of operation system and IPU
Disk D ≥88G Data disk For storage of IPU data and backup data
3-4
Software System
3.4.3 IPU installation procedure

1. Open the installation disk, right click the file setup.exe, and select "Run as administrator" to
start installation.
Figure 3-7 Run installation program
2. The "User Account Control" dialog box displays, select "Yes" to install the application.
3. The installation program checks system environment, such as operation system version
and database, and then the following dialog box displays.
3-5
Software System
Figure 3-8 Database installation
4. If there are modules missing for installation of the IPU, install the modules, and restart the
PC when the prompt message instructs so.
5. After all necessary modules are installed, the language selection screen displays, select
the desired language of the IPU here.
Figure 3-9 Language selection dialog box
6. Click OK to enter the model selection dialog box, select the desired product model here.
3-6
Software System
Figure 3-10 Model selection dialog box
7. Click "Next” to enter the installation path selection dialog box. The installation program
is normally installed in non-system disk. To make sure the "Analyzer IPU Software" can
run properly, the residual space of the installation disk shall be more than 100M.
Figure 3-11 Installation path selection dialog box
8. Click "Next" to start the installation process of "Analyzer IPU Software".
3-7
Software System
9. Click "OK" to conclude the installation process. An shortcut icon will be created on the
desktop and in the system menu.
Figure 3-12 Installation finished
Figure 3-13 Shortcut icon on the desktop
Figure 3-14 Shortcut icon in the system menu
3.4.4 IPU upgrade

"Analyzer IPU Software" upgrade refers to installation of higher version software on the
basis of the lower version. During the upgrade process, database installation directory
and installation path selection dialog box will be not displayed. The functions to be
3-8
Software System
completed are database structure upgrade, configuration file upgrade, print template
upgrade. During the upgrade process, the print template upgrade dialog box will be
displayed.
Figure 3-15 Upgrade the "Analyzer IPU Software"
3.4.5 IPU repair

When the "Analyzer IPU Software" fails to run as normal due to file damage, double click
the installation program, the "Repair and Upgrade" dialog box will display for you to
repair or upgrade the software.
Figure 3-16 Modify, repair or delete
3-9
Software System
This operation only affect program files.
3.5 Connection Setup of the IPU and Analyzer
3.5.1 Analyzer Network Setup

Install the IPU, the default analyzer IP is 10.0.0.7.
To modify analyzer IP, click "Setup - Advanced" to enter the following screen and input
the value of each field.
Figure 3-17 IP address setup
Click "Apply". After restart the analyzer, the IP address will be refreshed.
3.5.2 Connection status
Start the IPU and check the connection status icon on the top right; flickering
blue suggests the connection is alright.
3-10
Software System
Figure 3-18 Connection status icon
3.6 LIS Setup and Connection
3.6.1 LIS communication setup

The communication function supports unidirectional and bidirectional transmission of
analyzer data to LIS (HIS). The communication setup is done on the IPU. Scattergrams
and histograms can be transmitted in both binary and bitmap modes.
Network port communication is supported. Connection to LIS as client end or server is
supported. There are dynamic graphs or progress bars indicating communication
process. To ensure data safety during transmission, exiting from the IPU software is not
allowed. If you try to exit from the IPU, the dialog box "Transmitting, please try again
later...".
The communication setup of the IPU is as follows.
3-11
Software System
Figure 3-19 LIS connection setup screen
NOTE
1. Only support network port communication.
2. If IPU as server is not selected, then the IPU serves as a client end.
3. IP address: valid in the condition of IPU client end network port communication.
When the IPU communicates as client end, fill in the IP address of LIS server; when
the IPU communicates as server, the address is neglected.
4. Port: valid in the condition of IPU network port communication When the IPU
communicates as client end, fill in the LIS server port; when the IPU communicates
as server, and fill in name of the monitoring port of the local PC.
5. IPU as server: valid in the condition of network port communication; select this item,
the IPU will communicate as TCP server, or it will communicate as TCP client end.
6. Protocol type: select protocol and coding type, "HL7+UTF8" is supported by now.
7. ACK synchronous communication: this option applies to HL7 protocol in the
condition of network port communication, or this option will be neglected.
3-12
Software System
8. ACK overtime: valid if ACK synchronous communication applies; it refers to the

longest waiting interval of ACK message after the IPU sends analysis results.
9. Bidirectional LIS/HIS communication: if this option is selected, the analyzer will
search for sample information from LIS during analysis.
10. Auto Transmission: if this option is selected, sample results and L-J QC results with
special sample ID will be auto transmitted to IPU.
11. Histogram/scattergram transmitted as bitmap: if this option is not selected, the
bitmap data of histogram/scattergram transmitted is consistent with the screen
display; if it is selected, the bitmap data of histogram/scattergram transmitted is
consistent with the print output, with white background and the histogram only has
its profile.
12. L-J QC results transmitted in the format of sample results: if this option is selected,
L-J QC results will be transmitted in the format of sample results (for both auto
transmission and manual transmission); if it is not selected, L-J QC results will be
transmitted in the format of QC message.
13. Histogram transmission mode:
Not transmit, sample results do not include histogram data
Bitmap, sample results include histogram bitmap data
Data, sample results include binary raw data of the histogram.
14. Scattergram transmission mode:
Not transmit, sample results do not include scattergram data
Bitmap, sample results include scattergram bitmap data
Data, sample results include binary raw data of the scattergram.
15. Version
a. Default version is 1.0; it supports LIS communication of the former version.
b. If version 1.1 is selected, the transmitted contents will include new flags like WBC
system abnormal, DIFF system abnormal, RBC system abnormal, aspiration
abnormal, system abnormal and RBC clump.
3-13
Software System
3.6.2 Unidirectional LIS communication

3.6.2.1Function overview
 Auto transmission of normal samples
When IPU receives analysis results of normal samples, and auto transmission is on, the
results will be auto transmitted to LIS. If transmission succeeded, the samples will be
marked as transmitted samples in the review and report screen; if failed, prompt
message will be given.
 Auto transmission of QC samples
When IPU receives analysis results of QC samples, and auto transmission is on, the
results will be auto transmitted to LIS. If transmission failed, prompt message will be
given.
If "L-J QC results transmitted in the format of sample results" is selected, the L-J QC
results will be encoded as normal sample information; if it is not selected, the L-J QC
results will be encoded QC information.
Only L-J QC sample with special sample ID will be auto transmitted.
 Batch transmission of samples
Batch transmission of normal sample results can be initiated from the review and report
screen. If transmission succeeded, the sample results will be marked as transmitted. If
transmission ACK error occurs, prompt message will be given; if network connection
breaks off, prompt message will be given and the batching transmission will be
terminated.
 Batch transmission of QC samples
Batch transmission of QC sample results can be initiated from the QC screen. If

transmission ACK error occurs, prompt message will be given; if network connection
breaks off, prompt message will be given and the batching transmission will be
terminated.
 QC sample transmission parameters
a. The original value and display value of X-R, X Mean QC samples will be transmitted.
b. For X-B QC, only the display value will be transmitted.
 Batch transmission of samples in the review screen
Select samples in the review screen and click the Transmit button to transmit the selected
samples.
3-14
Software System
Figure 3-20 Batch transmission of samples in review screen
Click the Transmit button at the QC table screen, a dialog box displays, and then click
"Start" to send data. If no data is selected or the date range is illegal, prompt message
will be given.
Figure 3-21 Transmission of samples in QC table screen
3-15
Software System
3.6.2.2Error indication
 IPU as server
LIS off indication: no LIS connection, the LIS icon shows connection breaks off.
Error message for connection break-off during transmission: Connection breaks off! The
LIS icon shows connection breaks off.
 IPU as client end
Connection establishment failed: LIS connection failed. The LIS icon shows connection
breaks off.
Error message for connection break-off during transmission: Connection breaks off! The
LIS icon shows connection breaks off.
ACK response failed: transmission is continued, and the message "ACK response
failed!" is given. The message bubble will keep showing. The LIS icon shows
connection is on.
3.6.3 Bidirectional LIS communication

3.6.3.1Worklist of bidirectional LIS
On the worklist screen of bidirectional LIS, only the sample ID, loading mode, sample mode
and sample position boxes can be edited. Inquiry will be sent to LIS when saving records, a
progress bar will display at the bottom of the screen, and the sample list will be locked. When
legal result are found, the progress bar will disappear, the list will be unlocked and the screen
will be refreshed. If the inquiry times out, fails or the results are illegal, the saving operation
will be canceled.
Operation procedure:
Click the Add worklist button to create a blank worklist. Enter the sample ID, switch the cursor
or click Save directly. The IPU sends inquiry to LIS:
1. If the server fails to get started, the message "Monitoring initiation failed, restart the
IPU or modify the communication port and then try communication operation again."
will be displayed.
2. If the LIS function cannot be used at present, the message "No LIS/HIS connection
available" will be displayed, and saving operation will fail.
3. The communication module completes inquiry:
a. If communication error occurs or communication times out, the message
"Communication times out!" will be displayed.
b. If analysis mode is not obtained or illegal, the message "Invalid analysis mode"
will be displayed. If loading mode or sample mode is obtained, the information
will be displayed on the screen, and valid patient information will be displayed
too.
c. If patient information does not meet the requirement of the IPU data dictionary,
3-16
Software System
or pass the screen restriction check, the message "Obtained info. invalid" will
be displayed. If loading mode or sample mode is obtained, the information will
be displayed on the screen, analysis mode and valid patient information will be
displayed too.
d. If information obtained is legal, and loading mode or sample mode is obtained,
the information will be displayed on the screen, analysis mode and patient
information will be displayed too.
NOTE
 The loading mode or sample mode editing can be done in the process of the
inquiry, they can be modified any time in the saving process.
3.6.3.2Report pre-entry of bidirectional LIS

The bidirectional LIS function does not affect report pre-entry. Users can pre-enter
information, but when saving results, the information searched by the bidirectional LIS will be
used.
3.6.3.3Analysis of bidirectional LIS

1. When bidirectional LIS is on, analysis with sample ID auto increment is not allowed.
2. Bidirectional LIS affects open vial analysis not following the worklist and autoloading
analysis not following the worklist (following built-in barcode instead).
3.6.4 Frequently asked questions and the answers

Q: Why does LIS connection fail?
A: IPU sends inquiry to LIS, the message includes sample ID. LIS shall respond to the inquiry
with results (including mode and patient information) within 10s; if the respond times out,
prompt message will be given, and the saving operation or analysis flow will be terminated.
Q: Why cannot the communication function be used?
A: Invalid or no LIS communication setup; IPU is the server and no LIS connection.
Q: How many kinds of bidirectional LIS inquiry failure are there?
A:"No LIS/HIS connection available": users do not input legal connection settings,
communication cannot be started.
If the server fails to get started, the message "Monitoring initiation failed, restart the IPU
or modify the communication port and then try communication operation again." will be
displayed.
"Measurement mode invalid": there is no measurement mode in the message received,
or the measurement mode cannot be recognized.
"Communication times out": response times out; the response is not consistent with the
IPU data dictionary.
Q: Why does bidirectional LIS inquiry fail?
A: invalid or abnormal data.
3-17
Software System
Data sent from LIS will be considered invalid in the following conditions:
1) Character codes cannot be recognized.
2) String length exceeds storage limit.
3) Content is not the conventional type. For example: loading mode is not "OV", "AL" or
"CT".
For patient information, if content of a field is invalid, then the field is invalid, other patient
information fields are still valid.
Abnormal data refers to:
Communication times out;
Invalid data;
Missing field;
Not conforming to current mode.
Abnormal situations Data entry rules of the analyzer

Missing field Default mode will be used if users do not select mode
Invalid data after starting the analyzer or before turning on
Loading and bidirectional LIS. If users do select mode, the
sample mode selected mode will be used. If there are samples
already analyzed, mode of the previous sample will
be used.
Missing field Default mode will be used if users do not select mode
Invalid data after starting the analyzer or before turning on
bidirectional LIS. If users do select mode, the
Analysis mode
selected mode will be used. If there are samples
already analyzed, mode of the previous sample will
be used.
Patient Missing Blank

information Invalid data Blank
3-18
4 Main Parameters Description
4.1 Parameter Source

Test the parameters such as WBC, RBC, PLT and HGB of the blood and output 27
parameters; see the following table for details.
Clone Name Abbreviation Parameter source
White Blood WBC Gain the WBC by electric impulse number

Cell count tested by the analyzer
Basophil Bas# Bas# = Bas%*WBC
number
Basophil Bas% Bas% = Baso particle numbers in the BAS area
percentage in the Baso channel *100%/WBC
Neutrophil Neu# Neu# = WBC*Neu%
number
Neutrophil Neu% Neu% = particle numbers in the Neu area in
percentage the DIFF channel*100%/ all particle numbers
Leukon
except the ghost area in the Diff channel
（ Eosinophil Eos# Eos# = WBC*Eos%

parameters)
number
Eosinophil Eos% Eos% = particle numbers of the Eos area in the
percentage DIFF channel *100%/ all particle number
except the ghost area in the DIFF channel
，
Lymphocyte Lym# Lym# = WBC*Lym%
include 4 RUO parameters
number
Lymphocyte Lym% Lym% = particle numbers of the Lym area in
percentage the DIFF channel *100%/ all particle number
Monocyte Mon# Mon# = WBC*Mon%
number
Monocyte Mon% Mon% = particle numbers of the Mon area in
percentage the DIFF channel *100%/ all particle number
Abnormal ALY# ALY# = WBC*ALY%
Lymphocyte
number
Abnormal ALY% ALY% = particle numbers of the ALY area in
Lymphocyte the DIFF channel *100%/ all particle number
percentage except the ghost area in the DIFF channel
4-1
Main Parameters Description
Clone Name Abbreviation Parameter source

Large LIC# LIC# = WBC*LIC%
Immature Cell
number
Large LIC% LIC% = particle numbers of the LIC area in the
Immature Cell DIFF channel *100%/ all particle number
percentage except the ghost area in the DIFF channel
Red Blood Cell RBC Gain the RBC by electric impulse number
count tested by the analyzer
Hemoglobin HGB HGB=Constant*Ln(background permeate light
Concentration intensity/ sample permeate light intensity)
Mean MCV Gain the MCV by the RBC histogram
Corpuscular
Volume
Mean MCH MCH = HGB/RBC
Corpuscular
Hemoglobin
RBC-related(8 parameters)
Mean MCHC MCHC = HGB*100/HCT

Corpuscular
Hemoglobin
Concentration
Red Blood Cell RDW-CV Gain by the RBC histogram
Distribution
Width -
Coefficient of
Variation
Red Blood Cell RDW-SD Gain by calculating the SD of Corpuscular
Distribution Volume
Width -
Standard
Deviation
Hematocrit HCT HCT = RBC*MCV/10
Platelet PLT Gain the PLT by electric impulse number
tested by the analyzer
Mean Platelet MPV Calculated by the PLT histogram
parameters)
PLT-related (4
Volume
Platelet PDW Gain by the PLT histogram, which is 10GSD of
Distribution the PLT distribution
Width
Plateletcrit PCT PCT = PLT*MPV/10000
4-2
4.2 WBC Measurement
4.2.1 Flow Cytometry by Laser
Figure 4-1 WBC Measurement
After a predetermined volume of blood is aspirated and diluted by a certain amount of reagent,
it is injected into the flow cell. Surrounded with sheath fluid (diluent), the blood cells pass
through the center of the flow cell in a single column at a faster speed. When the blood cells
suspended in the diluent pass through the flow cell, they are exposed to a laser beam. The
intensity of scatter light reflects the blood cell size and intracellular density. The low-angle
scattered light reflects cell size, and the high-angle scattered light reflects intracellular density
(nucleus size and density). The optical detector receives this scatter light and converts it into
electrical pulses. Pulse data collected can be used to draw a 2-dimensional distribution
(scattergram). As shown in the following figure, X-axis represents the intracellular density and
Y-axis the blood cell size. Various types of analysis data can then be obtained from the
scattergrams.
4-3
Figure 4-2 DIFF channel scattergram
By analyzing the DIFF channel scattergram, the analyzer presents the Lym%, Mon%, Eos%
and Neu%.
4.2.2 Electrical Impedance Method

WBCs/BASs are counted and sized by the Electrical Impedance method. This method is
based on the measurement of changes in electrical resistance produced by a particle, which
in this case is a blood cell, suspended in a conductive diluent as it passes through an
aperture of known dimensions. An electrode is submerged in the liquid on both sides of the
aperture to create an electrical pathway. As each particle passes through the aperture, a
transitory change in the resistance between the electrodes is produced. This change
produces a measurable electrical pulse. The number of pulses generated signals the number
of particles that passed through the aperture. The amplitude of each pulse is proportional to
the volume of each particle.
Figure 4-3 Electrical Impedance method
4-4
Each pulse is amplified and compared to the internal reference voltage channel, which only
accepts the pulses of a certain amplitude. If the pulse generated is above the WBC/BAS
lower threshold, it is counted as a WBC/BAS. The analyzer presents the WBC/BAS
histogram; whose x-coordinate represents the cell volume (fL) and y-coordinate represents
the number of the cells.
4.2.3 WBC Parameters

Based on the analysis of the DIFF channel scattergram and the Lym region, Neu region, Mon
region and Eos region, the analyzer calculates the Lym%, Mon%, Eos% and Neu%. Having
achieved the WBC, the analyzer proceeds to calculate Lym#, Neu#, Mon# and Eos# per the
following equations while Bas# is obtained directly by the Electrical Impedance method and
express them in 109/L.
4.3 HGB Measurement
4.3.1 Colorimetric Method

HGB is determined by the colorimetric method. The WBC/HGB dilution is delivered to the
HGB bath where it is bubble mixed with a certain amount of lyse, which converts hemoglobin
to a hemoglobin complex that is measurable at 525 nm. An LED is mounted on one side of
the bath and emits a beam of monochromatic light, whose central wavelength is 525nm. The
light passes through the sample and is then measured by an optical sensor that is mounted
on the opposite side. The signal is then amplified and the voltage is measured and compared
to the blank reference reading (readings taken when there is only diluent in the bath), and the
HGB is measured and calculated in the analyzer automatically.
4.3.2 HGB
The HGB is calculated per the following equation and expressed in g/L.
 Blank Phot ocurrent 

HGB(g/L)  Constant  Ln  
 Sample Photocurr ent 
4.4 RBC/PLT Measurement

RBCs/PLTs are counted and sized by the Electrical Impedance method. This method is
based on the measurement of changes in electrical resistance produced by a particle, which
in this case is a blood cell, suspended in a conductive diluent as it passes through an
aperture of known dimensions. An electrode is submerged in the liquid on both sides of the
aperture to create an electrical pathway. As each particle passes through the aperture, a
transitory change in the resistance between the electrodes is produced. This change
produces a measurable electrical pulse. The number of pulses generated signals the number
4-5
of particles that passed through the aperture. The amplitude of each pulse is proportional to
the volume of each particle.
4.5 Time counting method
4.5.1 Structure
1.Cancel the Volumetric Board and the 6 corresponding valves

2.Change the Vacuum chamber from 128mL to 200mL
4.5.2 Principle
Volumetric method of the 53 series： The sample volume of each count (WBC 500uL, RBC
300uL) are measured by tube of fixed volume and initiated by the photocoupler.
Volumetric tube is canceled of the 53 series, the volumes of the impedance channel are
guaranteed by stable count time and stable aperture flow.
Time counting method of the 53 series: The volume of each count is guaranteed by the
following formula:
Measuring volume = Volumetric time x Aperture flow rate
4-6
4.6 Parameter Flag Message Information
4.6.1 Flag Message

There are 32 flag messages, which include susceptive flag and confirmative flag. Susceptive
flag indicates the flag is susceptive while confirmative flag indicates the item is abnormal. See
the following table for the indication and criteria of each flag.
Channel Flag Message Property Indication Criteria
Suspectable The WBC may be Calculate and compare

WBC abnormal
flag incorrect special parameters
Presence of abnormally
RBC Lyse Suspectable Possibility of RBC distributed dots in WBC
resistance flag lyse resistance sensitive region of the
WBC scattergram
WBC Abnormal The distribution of DIFF
Suspectable
Scattergram distribution of scattergram is
flag
Abn. WBC scattergram abnormal
Abnormal
WBC histogram Suspectable The distribution of
distribution of
Abn. flag histogram is abnormal
WBC histogram
Presence of excessive
Suspectable Possibility of left dots in left shift
Left Shift
flag shift sensitive region of the
scattergram
Possible presence Presence of excessive
WBC of immature dots in immature
Suspectable
immature cells granulocytes granulocyte sensitive
flag
region of the
scattergram
Abnormal
Abn./Atypical Suspectable possibility of scattergram/there are
Lym flag Abn./Atypical Lym excessive dots in the
Atypical Lym
Confirmative
leukocytosis WBC high WBC > 18.00×10^9/L
flag
Confirmative
Leukopenia WBC low
flag WBC < 2.50×10^9/L
Confirmative
Neutrophilia Neu# high
flag Neu# > 11.00×10^9/L
Confirmative
Neutropenia Neu# low
flag Neu# < 1.00×10^9/L
Confirmative
Lymphocytosis Lym# high
flag Lym# > 4.00×10^9/L
4-7
Confirmative
Lymphopenia Lym# low
flag Lym# < 0.80×10^9/L
Confirmative
Monocytosis Mon# high
flag Mon# > 1.50×10^9/L
Confirmative
Eosinophilia Eos# high
flag Eos# > 0.70×10^9/L
Confirmative
Basophils high Baso# high
flag Baso# > 0.20×10^9/L
Hemoglobin Calculate and compare
Turbidity/HGB Suspectable abnormal or there special parameters
Interference flag is HGB
interference
RBC results
Suspectable Calculate and compare
RBC possibly
flag special parameters
Agglutination inaccurate
Two or more wave Two or more wave
Dimorphic Suspectable
crests in the RBC crests in the RBC
Population flag
histogram histogram
Abnormal
Suspectable The distribution of RBC
RBC Histogram distribution of RBC
flag histogram is abnormal
Abn. histogram
RBC Suspectable Possibility of iron Calculate and compare
Iron Deficiency
flag deficiency special parameters
Confirmative RDW-CV> 22 or
Anisocytosis Anisocytosis
flag RDW-SD > 64fL
Microcytosis Confirmative MCV low
MCV < 70fL
flag
Macrocytosis Confirmative MCV high
MCV > 113fL
flag
Confirmative
erythrocytosis RBC high RBC > 6.5×10^12/L
flag
Confirmative
Anemia Anemia HGB < 90g/L
flag
Confirmative
Hypochromia Hypochromia MCHC<290
flag
Abnormal Abnormal
Suspectable The distribution of PLT
distribution of distribution of PLT
flag histogram is abnormal
PLT histogram histogram
PLT Suspectable Possibility of PLT Calculate and compare
Platelet clumps
flag clump special parameters
Confirmative PLT high
Thrombocytosis PLT>600×10^9/L
flag
4-8
Confirmative PLT low

Thrombopenia PLT<60×10^9/L
flag
4.6.2 Shield plan

See the following table for the shield relation of each flag.
Channel
Flag message Property Shield relation
name
Suspectable Shield related parameters of
WBC Abn.
flag the WBC clone or prompt “R”
RBC Lyse Suspectable Shield related parameters of

resistance flag the WBC clone or prompt “R”
WBC Scattergram Suspectable Shield related parameters of

Abn. flag the WBC clone or prompt “R”
WBC Histogram Suspectable Shield related parameters of

Abn. flag the WBC clone or prompt “R”
Suspectable related parameters of the

Left Shift
flag WBC clone or prompt “R”

Immature Cell

Abn./Atypical Lym
WBC Confirmative
Leucocytosis /
flag
Confirmative
Leucopenia /
flag
Confirmative
Neutrophilia /
flag
Confirmative
Neutropenia /
flag
Confirmative
Lymphocytosis /
flag
Confirmative
Lymphopenia /
flag
Confirmative
Monocytosis /
flag
Confirmative
Eosinophilia /
flag
Basophilia Confirmative /
4-9
Channel
Flag message Property Shield relation
name
flag
Turbidity/HGB Suspectable related parameters of the

Interference flag RBC clone or prompt “R”
Hemo Suspectable related parameters of the

Agglutination flag RBC clone or prompt “R”
Dimorphic Suspectable Shield related parameters of

Population flag the RBC clone or prompt “R”
RBC histogram Suspectable related parameters of the

Abn. flag RBC clone or prompt “R”
Suspectable
Iron Deficiency /
flag
RBC Confirmative
Anisocytosis /
flag
Confirmative
Microcytosis /
flag
Confirmative
Macrocytosis /
flag
Confirmative
Erythrocytosis /
flag
Confirmative
Anemia /
flag
Confirmative
Hypochromia /
flag
PLT Histogram Suspectable related parameters of the

Abn flag RBC clone or prompt “R”

Platelet clumps
flag RBC clone or prompt “R”
PLT
Confirmative
thrombocytosis /
flag
Confirmative
Thrombocytopenia /
flag
4-10
4.6.3 Sensitivity adjustment mechanism

Meet the requirements of each hospital by Sensitivity adjustment mechanism flag rate. There
are two types of the Sensitivity adjustment mechanism: QFLA Adjustment mechanism
/Sensitivity coefficient adjustment mechanism. There is no access restriction for the QFLA
Adjustment mechanism, the adjustable range is 0~100. Only access of the customer service
or above can adjust the Sensitivity adjustment mechanism, the adjustable range is 0~10.
Flag Property Venous blood capillary blood
QFLA Adjustment
mechanism /Sensitivity
Suspectable QFLA Adjustment coefficient adjustment
WBC Abnormal flag mechanism mechanism
QFLA Adjustment
mechanism / Sensitivity
RBC Lyse Suspectable QFLA Adjustment coefficient adjustment
resistance flag mechanism mechanism
QFLA Adjustment
mechanism /
Sensitivity QFLA Adjustment
coefficient mechanism / Sensitivity
WBC Scattergram Suspectable adjustment coefficient adjustment
Abn. flag mechanism mechanism
WBC histogram Suspectable QFLA Adjustment QFLA Adjustment
QFLA Adjustment
mechanism /Sensitivity
Left Shift flag mechanism mechanism
QFLA Adjustment
mechanism / Sensitivity
Immature Cell flag mechanism mechanism
QFLA Adjustment
mechanism Sensitivity
Abn./Atypical Lym flag mechanism mechanism
Turbidity/HGB Suspectable QFLA Adjustment QFLA Adjustment
Interference flag mechanism mechanism
Hemo Suspectable QFLA Adjustment QFLA Adjustment
Agglutination flag mechanism mechanism
Dimorphic Suspectable QFLA Adjustment QFLA Adjustment
Population flag mechanism mechanism
RBC histogram Suspectable QFLA Adjustment QFLA Adjustment
4-11
Flag Property Venous blood capillary blood

Suspectable QFLA Adjustment QFLA Adjustment
Iron Deficiency flag mechanism mechanism
PLT Abn Suspectable QFLA Adjustment QFLA Adjustment
Distribution flag mechanism mechanism
Suspectable QFLA Adjustment QFLA Adjustment
Platelet clumps flag mechanism mechanism
4-12
5 Error Information of the Analyzer
5.1 Error Code
5.1.1 Pressure Testing
Troubleshooting and
Error ID Error Name Error Mechanism
Solution
Pressure control 1. Check if the wires
The generated
error of the between the drive
0x01000601 pressure is out of the
pressure board and main board,
set pressure range
chamber wires between the main
Pressure control board and the analog
The generated
error of the signal board are
0x01000602 pressure is out of the
vacuum connected properly;
set pressure range
chamber check if the pipe of the
Pressure value pressure sensor on the
of the pressure The pressure test is analog signal board is
0x01000605
chamber is out out of set range reliable.
of range 2. Check if the pressure
and vacuum chamber
is installed correctly.
3. Click the "Remove
error" button or check if
the status is OK in the
self-test screen, see if
the error is removed;
Pressure value
4. Restart to see if it is
of the vacuum Out of the set range of
0x01000606 normal.
chamber is out pressure test
5. Check if the valve
of range
and pump work
properly.
6. If the problem cannot
be solved, the pressure
sensor may be
ineffective, change the
Analog signal board.
5-1
Error Information of the Analyzer
5.1.2 Temperature Module
Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. Check if the version
information of the drive
MCU and FPGA are
correct;
2. Check if the
temperature of the
reaction bath is within the
range of [34.5,31.5]℃;
The temperature is 0℃,
the input end of the
photocoupler is short
circuit, the sensor maybe
damaged or the wires are
short-circuit
The Reaction bath If the temperature value is
Abnormal
temperature does not 70 ℃ , confirm as the
temperature of
0x01003030 meet the design actual temperature
the Reaction
requirements in the A. If yes, replace the drive
bath
sequence design. board
B. If the input end of the
sensor is open circuit, the
sensor maybe damaged
or the wires are not well
connected
3. If the temperature is
lower than the minimum
range, confirm as the
heating light. If the light is
on constantly, confirm
that the heating wire is
OK, otherwise the heater
is damaged, replace the
components
Environment
Environment information of the drive
temperature is
temperature is out of MCU and FPGA；
0x1003031 out of the range
the range of work 2. Check if the actual
of work
environment temperature of the device
environment
is within the range of
5-2
Troubleshooting and
Solution
[15,30]℃；
3. Check if the wires of
the temperature sensor
are connected properly；
4. Replace the connecting
wires of the temperature
sensor.
MCU and FPGA are
correct;
2. Check if the actual
temperature of the device
is within the range of
[10,40]℃;
short-circuit
If the temperature value is
0x1003032 70 ℃ , confirm as the
actual temperature
A. If yes, replace the drive
board
connected
Environment the temperature sensor is
temperature is OK；
out of the Environment 4. Check if the wires and
running temperature is out of the heater are OK；
environment the running 5. Change the wires of
range environment range the temperature sensor.
Laser diode 1. Check if the version
Laser diode temperature is out of information of the drive
0x01003033
temp. abnormal the run environment MCU and FPGA are
range correct;
5-3
Troubleshooting and
Solution
2. Check if the optical
temperature of the
reaction bath is within the
range of [30,40]℃;
short-circuit
70 ℃ , confirm as the
actual temperature
board
connected
components
MCU and FPGA are
correct;
2. Check if the
Abnormal temperature is within
Abnormal diluent
0x0100041D diluent the range of [25,36]℃;
temperature
temperature If the temperature is
higher than 36℃, check if
the diluent temperature is
within the range of
[25,33]℃;
5-4
Troubleshooting and
Solution
short-circuit
70 ℃ , confirm as the
actual temperature
board
connected
assembly
5.1.3 Syringe Module

 Errors occur at the user end
Error ID Error Name Error Mechanism Troubleshooting and Solution

1. The initialization has The photocoupler may be
passed the damaged or the resistance of the
photocoupler area, but motor assembly is too large,
the photocoupler is still which results in the step missing
Sampling blocked; or drive error.
syringe 2. The initialization has Low possibility.
0x01000301
photocoupler returned to the 1. Check if the software and
error photocoupler area, but hardware versions are correct,
the photocoupler is not and if the 24V, 12V and 5V power
blocked; is normal;
3. The reset shall not be 2. Check if the wires of the
at the initial position, but photocoupler and motor are
5-5

the photocoupler is reliable, check if there is bad
blocked connection of the plug;
Sampling It has returned to the 3. Click the "Remove error"
syringe initial position button to see if the error can be
0x01000302 aspirate and theoretically, but the removed;
drain action photocoupler is not 4 、 Perform self-test at the
error 1 blocked; self-test screen to see if the error
Sampling is removed;
It is not in the initial
syringe 5. See if the
position theoretically,
0x01000303 aspirate and LED(ASP-M3_LED2;
but the photocoupler is
drain action SP-M4_LED2, SH-M5_LED2,
blocked;
error 2 DIL-M6_LED2, LYSE-M7_LED2)
Sampling of relevant light flashes during
It shall be in the initial
syringe does the motor action. If not, replace
position theoretically
not permit the drive board;
0x01000304 when starts the action,
the aspirate 6. Check if the photocoupler is
and drain OK: see if there is any changes
not blocked;
action 1 of status when it is blocked or
Sampling not;
It shall not be in the
syringe does 7. Remove the bad photocoupler
initial position
not permit and check if there is dusts to
0x01000305 theoretically when starts
the aspirate block the luminous surface or if
the action, but the
and drain there is fluids on the luminous
photocoupler is blocked;
action 2 surface of the photocoupler;
1. The initialization has 8. Wipe the photocoupler surface
passed the and see if the error is removed
photocoupler area, but after the installation, if not,
the photocoupler is still replace the photocoupler;
blocked; 9. See if the installation of the
Sampling 2. The initialization has syringe assembly is OK;
syringe returned to the 10. If the error is not removed,
0x01000311
photocoupler photocoupler area, but replace the relevant syringe
error the photocoupler is not assembly.
blocked；
3. The reset shall not be
at the initial position, but
the photocoupler is
blocked
Sampling It has returned to the
syringe initial position
0x01000312 aspirate and theoretically, but the
drain action photocoupler is not
error 1 blocked;
5-6

Sampling
syringe
0x01000313 aspirate and
drain action
blocked;
error 2
Sampling
It has returned to the
syringe does
initial position
not permit
0x01000314 theoretically, but the
the aspirate
photocoupler is not
and drain
blocked;
action 1
Sampling
syringe does It is not in the initial
not permit position theoretically,
0x01000315
the aspirate but the photocoupler is
and drain blocked;
action 2
1. The initialization has
passed the
photocoupler area, but
the photocoupler is still
blocked；
Sheath fluid 2. The initialization has
syringe returned to the
0x01000321
photocoupler photocoupler area, but
error the photocoupler is not
blocked；
the photocoupler is
blocked
Sheath fluid It has returned to the
error 1 blocked;
Sheath fluid
syringe
drain action
blocked;
error 2
Sheath fluid It has returned to the
0x01000324
syringe does initial position
5-7

not permit theoretically, but the
the aspirate photocoupler is not
and drain blocked;
action 1
Sheath fluid
not permit position theoretically, but
0x01000325
the aspirate the photocoupler is
and drain blocked;
action 2
passed the
blocked；
Hemolysin 2. The initialization has
0x01000331
blocked；
the photocoupler is
blocked
Hemolysin It has returned to the
error 1 blocked;
Hemolysin
syringe
position theoretically, but
the photocoupler is
drain action
blocked;
error 2
Hemolysin
syringe does
initial position
not permit
the aspirate
photocoupler is not
and drain
blocked;
action 1
Hemolysin It is not in the initial
0x01000335 syringe does position theoretically, but
not permit the photocoupler is
5-8

the aspirate blocked;
and drain
action 2
passed the
blocked；
Diluent 2. The initialization has
0x01000341
blocked；
the photocoupler is
blocked
Diluent It has returned to the
error 1 blocked;
Diluent
syringe
position theoretically, but
the photocoupler is
drain action
blocked;
error 2
Diluent
syringe does
initial position
not permit
the aspirate
photocoupler is not
and drain
blocked;
action 1
Diluent
not permit position theoretically,
0x01000345
the aspirate but the photocoupler is
and drain blocked;
action 2
5-9
 Low possibility to occur at user end
Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. Action time conflicts in The errors mainly
Sample Syringe the sequence; occur during the R&D
0x01000300
is working 2. Transmitting time error of debugging, when error
the software occurs at the user end,
1. Action time conflict in the the main reason is time
Sampling
sequence; command conflict, click
0x01000310 syringe is
2. Transmitting time error of the "Remove error"
working
the software button, if the error is
1. Action time conflict in the not removed, please
Sheath fluid
sequence; restart the device.
2. Transmitting time error of Other special
working
the software troubleshooting is not
1. Action time conflict in the required.
Hemolysin
sequence;
2. Transmitting time error of
working
the software
1. Action time conflict in the
Diluent syringe sequence;
0x01000340
is working 2. Transmitting time error of
the software
Aspirate volume set by the
Aspirate volume sequence is out of range
of the sampling Use during the R&D phase
0x01000306
syringe is out of If occurs at the user end, it
range indicates software or
program error
Drain volume set by the
sequence is out of range
Drain volume of
It is use during the R&D
the sampling
0x01000307 phase
syringe is out of
If it occurs at the user end, it
range
indicates software or
program error
Sampling If the error occurs at the
0x01000308 syringe action user end, it is the software
overtime bug
Aspirate volume Aspirate volume set by the
of the Sample sequence is out of range
0x01000316
Injection Use during the R&D phase
Syringe is out of If occurs at the user end, it
5-10
Troubleshooting and
Solution
range indicates software or
program error
Drain volume of sequence out of range
the Sample Use during the R&D phase
0x01000317
Injection Syringe If occurs at the user end, it
is out of range indicated software or
program error
Sample
If the error occurs at the
Injection
0x01000318 user end, it is the software
Syringe action
bug
overtime
Aspirate volume sequence out of range
of the Sheath Use during the R&D phase
0x01000326
fluid syringe out If occurs at the user end, it
of range indicated software or
program error
Drain volume of sequence is out of range
the sheath fluid Use during the R&D phase
0x01000327
syringe is out of If occurs at the user end, it
range indicated software or
program error
Sheath fluid If the error occurs at the
0x01000328 syringe action user end, it is the software
overtime bug
Aspirate volume
of the hemolysin
0x01000336 phase
syringe is out of
If occurs at the user end, it
range
program error
Drain volume of
the hemolysin
0x01000337 phase
syringe is out of
range
program error
0x01000338 Hemolysin If the error occurs at the
5-11
Troubleshooting and
Solution
syringe action user end, it is the software
overtime bug
Aspirate volume sequence out of range
of the Diluent Use during the R&D phase
0x01000346
syringe out of If occurs at the user end, it
range indicated software or
program error
Drain volume of
the diluent
0x01000347 phase
syringe is out of
range
program error
If the error occurs at the
Diluent syringe
0x01000348 user end, it is the software
action overtime
bug
5.1.4 Sampling assembly module

Troubleshooting and
Solution
If it fails to move to the 1. Check if each software and
correct position hardware version is correct,
horizontally, it check if the 24V, 12V and 5V
indicates horizontal voltage is normal;
motor action error or 2. When checking the error,
photocoupler error are ensure that the relevant wires
as follows: of the error are connected
1. The wires of properly, such as if the inner
X motor failed to position photocoupler wires of the sample assembly
0x01000201 move to target or horizontal motor are are reliable, if the labels of
position damaged sensor wires match the
2. Position sensor positions, if the labels
photocoupler error of motor wires match the
3. Horizontal motor motor position.
error 3. Click the "Remove error"
4. Board error button;
5. Larger resistance of 4. Click X or Y motor self-test
the sampling button at the self-test screen
assembly horizontally to see if the error is removed;
5-12
Troubleshooting and
Solution
X motor See if the LED
initialization fails (X-M1_LED2;Y-M2_LED2) of
0x01000202
to move to initial X motor failed to move relevant light flashes during
position to target position the motor action. If not,
It shall leave the initial replace the drive board;
position during the 6. Check if the photocoupler
initialization, but the is OK: check if the status of
X motor
photocoupler testing is the two photocouplers at X
initialization fails
0x01000203 still in the initial direction and one
to leave the
position, it indicates photocoupler at Y direction
initial position
the horizontal motor change when blocked or not
action error or blocked;
photocoupler error 7. Remove the bad
X motor The same as 0x201 photocoupler and check if
adjusting does error, it only occurs there is dusts to block the
0x01000204
not move to during the position luminous surface or if there is
target position adjusting process fluids on the luminous surface
If fail to move correct of the photocoupler;
position vertically, it 8. Wipe the photocoupler
indicates the vertical surface and see if the error is
motor action error or removed after the installation,
photocoupler error are if not, replace the
as follows: photocoupler;
1. The wires of 9. If it is not removed, check if
position photocoupler the motor fails to move to
Y motor failed to
or horizontal motor photocoupler position
0x01000211 move to target
are damaged because of step missing or
position
2. Position clogging.(low possibility, it
photocoupler error seldom happens).
3. Horizontal motor
error
4. Board error
5. Larger resistant of
the sampling
assembly vertically
Y motor It shall move to the
initialization fails initial position
to move to up vertically, but the
0x01000212 position photocoupler of the
initial position is not
blocked, it indicates
the vertical motor
5-13
Troubleshooting and
Solution
action error or
photocoupler error are
as follows:
Y motor It shall move from the
initialization fails initial position
to move to lower vertically, but the
position photocoupler of the
initial position is
0x01000213
blocked, it indicates
the vertical motor
action error or
photocoupler error are
as follows:
Y motor The same as 0x211
adjustment fails which appears during
0x01000214 to move to the the position
target position adjustment process
and can be merged
Y motor The same as 0x212
adjustment does and can be merged
0x01000215
not return to the
up position
If horizontal motor
moves in the following
condition, report the
error:
X motor does
1. The position
0x01000223 not permit the
photocoupler is
action
blocked
2. Vertical initial
position photocoupler
is not blocked
Y motor does If the position is
not permit the blocked, the vertical
0x01000226
action motor is working ,
report the error
Y motor does The motor cannot
not pierce to the drive the sample
lower position probe to pierce the
0x01000228
cap, when the sample
probe returns to the
up position, error is
5-14
Troubleshooting and
Solution
reported
Horizontal initial During the
position initialization, it shall
photocoupler return to the horizontal
0x01000231 error initial position, but the
photocoupler at the
horizontal initial
position is not blocked
Photocoupler on It shall return to the
the sample vertical initial position
probe error vertically, but the
0x01000235
vertical initial position
photocoupler is not
blocked
Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. It only appears at the
position adjusting process
2.Check if the process,
adjusting process and if the
When adjusting the
adjustment to the target
Y motor position, if the vertical
position are correct
0x01000218 Adjusting Steps adjusting is out of the
3.If the above items are all
out of limit limit, it shall be
correct, check if the sample
readjust
assembly are correct
correct, replace the
sampling assembly
1. It only appears at the
position adjusting process
2.Check if the adjusting
process and if the
When adjusting the
adjustment to the target
X motor position, if the vertical
position are correct
0x01000208 Adjusting Steps adjusting is out of the
out of limit limit, it shall be
correct, check if the sample
readjusted
assembly are correct
correct, replace the
sampling assembly
0x0100027E RBC position At the corresponding 1. The error only occurs
5-15
Troubleshooting and
Solution
right edge of the position, the edges of after the position adjustment
gap out of limit relevant position and exit the screen
RBC position photocoupler are too 2. If 272-274, 277-278 or
0x01000272 left edge of the close 27E errors are reported,
gap out of limit check the installation of the
WBC position sampling assembly, if there
0x01000273 right edge of the is no problem, replace the
gap out of limit sampling assembly;
WBC position 3. If other errors are
0x01000274 left edge of the reported, adjust the relevant
gap out of limit position
DIFF position 4. If the error is still
0x01000275 right edge of the reported, check if the
gap out of limit adjusting process and the
DIFF position adjustment to the target
0x01000276 left edge of the position are correct
gap out of limit 5. If the above are all
Right edge of correct, check if the
the open-vial sampling assembly is
0x01000277 installed correctly
position gap out
of limit 6. If the above are all
Left edge of the correct, replace the
open-vial sampling assembly
0x01000278
position gap out
of limit
Right edge of
the autoloading
0x01000279
position gap out
of limit
Left edge of the
autoloading
0x0100027A
position gap out
of limit
Right edge of
the closed-tube
0x0100027B
position gap out
of limit
Left edge of the
closed-tube
0x0100027C
position gap out
of limit
0x01000217 Y motor During the Remove error, restart the
5-16
Troubleshooting and
Solution
adjusting adjustment, the analyzer failed
position error adjustment
transmission is not
reported at No. 0-6
position, it is
considered not to
occur at the user end
Disorder position
adjustment command
Y motor end order transmission, it Remove error, restart the
0x01000219
position error is software error, the analyzer failed
software shall be
restarted
During the
adjustment, the
adjustment
X motor
transmission is not Remove error, restart the
0x01000207 adjusting
reported at No. 0-9 analyzer failed
position error
position, it is
considered not to
occur at the user end
Disorder position
adjustment command
X motor end order transmission, it Remove error, restart the
0x01000209
position error is software error, the analyzer failed
software shall be
restarted
1. Action time conflict
in the sequence;
The sample 2. Transmitting time It happens accidentally,
0x01000220
probe is working error of the software remove the error directly
3. Drive program
count error
If the initialization is Remove error, restart the
The sample
not started, perform analyzer failed
probe does not
left or right and up and
0x01000221 permit
down adjustment and
adjustment
adjustment of the
software bug
If the error occurs at Remove error, restart the
X motor action
0x01000222 the user end, it is the analyzer failed
overtime
software bug
5-17
Troubleshooting and
Solution
If the error occurs at
Y motor action Remove error, restart the
0x01000225 the user end, it is the
overtime analyzer failed
software bug
5.1.5 Board module

Troubleshooting and
Solution
24V power Low possibility of the
Out of the range:
0x010030A3 voltage electrical circuit status
[22,30]V
abnormal error.
information is correct;
2. Check if the wires
12V power
Out of the range: between power board and
0x010030A4 voltage
[11.4,12.6]V each board are OK;
abnormal
3. Remove the error
4. If it cannot be removed,
replace the drive board
5.1.6 Analog signal board module

Troubleshooting and
Solution
+ 12v analogue Low possibility of circuit
Out of the range:
0x010030A1 voltage status error
[11.4,12.6]V
abnormal 1. Check if the version
information is correct;
between power board
and each board are OK;
2. If outlet of relevant
- 12v analogue
Out of the range: power is OK, if the power
0x010030A2 voltage
[-12.6,-11.4]V is not within the range,
abnormal
replace the power
3. Remove the error
4. If it cannot be removed,
replace the Analog signal
board
56V power The voltage 1. First check if the
0x010030A0 voltage monitor value does versions of CPU, versions
abnormal not meet the design of main control board
5-18
Troubleshooting and
Solution
requirements FPGA are correct
the Analog signal board
J8 are connected
properly;
3. Take out the wire
connectors of the J8
Analog signal board ;
4. Test the TP48 voltage
with the multimeter, if
exceed the range of
1.206V~1.474V, replace
the Analog signal board;
5. If it does not exceed
the range, replace the J8
wires (C-009-002228-00),
connect the J8 and click
the "Remove error"
button
6. If the error cannot be
removed, replace the
main control board
1. First check if the
versions of CPU, versions
of main control board
FPGA are correct
2. Check if the wires are
connected reliably, check
if there are scratching or
damage of the wires, the
During the HGB
wires include:
measurements, the
Laser diode C-009-002226-00 control
0x01003061 current of laser board
current wires of the optical
does not meet the
system
design expectation
C-009-002228-00
low-speed wires of the
main control Analog
signal board
C-009-002229-00 digit
wire of the main control
analog signal board
3. Check if the analog
5-19
Troubleshooting and
Solution
signal board is normal
a. Check if the analog
signal board TP32 is
smaller than 0.1V, if yes,
it indicates Analog signal
board error
b. Check if the power
supply of the laser control
board is normal:
J1.1:[-12.6,-11.4]V ；
J1.4:[11.4,12.6]V, if not,
replace the wire
C-009-002226-00, if it is
still not within the range, it
indicates analog signal
board error, replace the
analog signal board；
4. Check if the laser
control board is normal
a. Check if the TPILD
voltage of the laser
control board is within the
range of 1.2V~4.5V, if not,
replace the laser control
board, test again, if the
value is still not within the
range, it indicates optical
system error, replace it
b. Check if the switch
control of the laser control
is normal:
J1.6:5V;J1.5<0.8V, if it is
within the range, replace
the laser control board;
Test again, if not, it
indicates the optical
system error, replace it
5. Check if the main
control board is normal
a. Check if the J8.9
voltage of the analog
signal board and the
5-20
Troubleshooting and
Solution
TPILD voltage of the laser
control board, if yes,
replace the wire
C-009-002228-00, if the
error still exists, it
indicates the main control
board error, replace it；if
not, replace the wire
C-009-002226-00
b. Replace the wire
C-009-002229-00, if the
error still exists, it
indicates the main control
board error, replace it
1. Check if the right-side
door can be opened, if
yes, close the door and
remove the error;
2. If the error is reported
when the door is closed,
check the installation of
the micro-switch, see if
the photocoupler can be
pressed when the door is
Open the side
Open the right side closed;
0x010030D0 door of the
door 3. Check if the wires of
analyzer
the micro switch are
reliable and see if they
are damaged;
4. See if the micro switch
is OK: see if the status
changed when pressed or
ejected the micro switch;
5. If the error is not
photocoupler.
1. Check if the optical
system is locked tightly, if
The optical
The optical assembly yes, close the door and
0x010030D1 assembly is
is loosen remove the error;
opened
2. If the error is reported
when the door is closed,
5-21
Troubleshooting and
Solution
check the installation of
the micro-switch, see if
the micro switch can be
pressed when the door is
closed;
the micro switch are
reliable and see if they
are damaged;
4. See if the micro switch
changed when pressed or
ejected the micro switch;
micro switch.
5.1.7 Autoloader Mechanism

 Motor module
Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. Check if the versions of
the software, sequence
Mix Mechanism and autoloader are correct
0x01005201 Software
is working 2. Remove the error
3. Restart the software and
analyzer
The motor shall not be 1. Check if each software
at the initial position, and hardware version is
Mix Mechanism but the photocoupler
correct；
0x01005202 X motor action of the initial position is
error 1 blocked, SMXM initial 2. When checking the error,
position photocoupler ensure that the relevant
or motor error wires of the error are
The motor shall be at connected properly, such
the initial position, but as if the wires of the motor
Mix Mechanism
the photocoupler of and photocoupler are
0x01005203 X motor action
the initial position is reliable, if the label of
error 2
not blocked, SMXM sensor wires match the
initial position sensor positions, if the
5-22
Troubleshooting and
Solution
photocoupler or motor labels of motor wires match
error the motor position.
Z motor or R Z motor or R motor 3. Click the remove error
0x01005204 motor not at the not at the initial button to see if it is
initial position position removed;
The motor shall not be 4. Click Mix mechanism
at the end position, self-test at the self-test
Mix Mechanism but the photocoupler screen to see if it is
0x01005207 X motor action of the end position is removed;
error 1 blocked, SMXM end 5. Check if the
position photocoupler photocoupler is OK: see if
or motor error the status changes when
blocked or not blocked;
6. Once confirm which
photocoupler is bad,
remove it and check if its
luminous surface is
blocked by the dust or
there is fluids splashed on
the surface;
The motor shall be at
7. Wipe the surface of the
the end position, but
photocoupler and install it
Mix Mechanism the photocoupler of
to see if the error is
0x01005208 X motor action the end position is not
removed, if not, replace the
error 2 blocked, SMXM end
photocoupler;
8. If the error still is not
or motor error
removed, check if the
motor fail to move to the
photocoupler position
because of missing step or
fail to drive the sample
probe to pierce the cap(low
possibility, generally will not
happen).
1. When checking the error,
ensure that the relevant
X initial photocoupler
wires of the error are
Mix Mechanism and end photocoupler
connected properly, such
0x01005209 X photocoupler of the mix mechanism
as if the wires of the
error are blocked at the
photocoupler are reliable, if
same time
the label of sensor wires
match the sensor positions.
5-23
Troubleshooting and
Solution
2. Check if there is foreign
material between the two
photocouplers;
3. Click the remove error
button to see if it is
removed;
4. Click Mix mechanism
self-test at the self-test
screen to see if it is
removed;
5. Check if the
photocoupler is OK: see if
the status changes when
luminous surface is
the surface;；
7.Wipe the surface of the

photocoupler;
5-24
 Mix Mechanism Z direction
Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. Check if the versions of the
software, sequence and
Mix Mechanism Software transmit autoloader are correct
0x01005401
is working command delay 2. Remove the error
analyzer
The motor shall not be 1. Check if each software and
at the initial position, hardware version is correct；
Mix Mechanism but the photocoupler 2. When checking the error,
0x01005402 Z motor action of the initial position is ensure that the relevant wires
error 1 blocked, SMZM initial of the error are connected
position photocoupler properly, such as if the wires
or motor error of the motor and photocoupler
The motor shall be at are reliable, if the label of
the initial position, but sensor wires match the
the photocoupler of sensor positions, if the labels
Mix Mechanism
the initial position is of motor wires match the
0x01005403 Z motor action
not blocked, SMzM motor position.
error 2
initial position 3. Click the "Remove error"
photocoupler or motor button to see if it is removed;
error 4. Click "Mix mechanism
X motor is not at the self-test" at the self-test
Mix mechanism end position or the mix screen to see if it is removed;
Z motor current mechanism is not at 5. Check if the photocoupler
0x01005404
action is not the initial position, is OK: see if the status
allowed SMZM action is not changes when blocked or not
allowed blocked;
The motor shall not be 6. Once confirm which
at the end position, photocoupler is bad, remove
Mix Mechanism but the photocoupler it and check if its luminous
0x01005407 Z motor action of the end position is surface is blocked by the dust
error 1 blocked, SMZM end or there is fluids splashed on
position photocoupler the surface;
or motor error 7. Wipe the surface of the
photocoupler and install it to
see if the error is removed, if
Mix Mechanism the end position, but
not, replace the photocoupler;
0x01005408 Z motor action the photocoupler of
error 2 the end position is not
removed, check if the motor
blocked, SMZM end
fail to move to the
5-25
Troubleshooting and
Solution
position photocoupler photocoupler position
or motor error because of missing step or
fail to drive the sample probe
to pierce the cap(low
happen).
ensure that the relevant wires
of the error are connected
properly, such as if the wires
of the photocoupler are
reliable, if the label of sensor
wires match the sensor
positions.
2. Check if there is foreign
material between the two
photocouplers;
3. Click the "Remove error"
button to see if it is removed;
Y initial photocoupler
Mix Mechanism and end photocoupler
self-test at the self-test screen
0x01005409 Z photocoupler of the mix mechanism
to see if it is removed;
error are blocked at the
5. Check if the photocoupler
same time
changes when blocked or not
blocked;
photocoupler is bad, remove
it and check if its luminous
surface is blocked by the dust
or there is fluids splashed on
the surface;；
not, replace the photocoupler;
5-26
 Mix Mechanism rotation
Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. Check if the mix
mechanism Z direction is at
the end position, see if the X
Z motor is not at the
direction is at the end
Mix motor end position or X
position;
0x01005500 current action is motor is not at the end
2. Check if the wires and
not allowed position, action is not
photocoupler of the Z or X
allowed
are OK；
3. Remove the error.

the software, sequence and
The Mix
Software transmit autoloader are correct
0x01005501 Mechanism is
command delay 2. Remove the error
working
analyzer
The motor shall not be 1. Check if each software
at the initial position, and hardware version is
but the photocoupler
Mix Mechanism correct；
0x01005502 of the initial position is
action failed
blocked, SMRM initial 2. When checking the error,
position photocoupler ensure that the relevant
or motor error wires of the error are
The motor shall be at connected properly, such as
the initial position, but if the wires of the motor and
the photocoupler of photocoupler are reliable, if
Mix Mechanism the initial position is the label of sensor wires
0x01005503
action failed not blocked, SMRM match the sensor positions,
initial position if the labels of motor wires
photocoupler or motor match the motor position.
error 3. Click the remove error
X motor is not at the button to see if it is
Mix motor does end position or the Z removed;
0x01005504 not permit the motor is not at the end 4. Click Mix mechanism
action position, action is not self-test at the self-test
allowed screen to see if it is
The motor shall The motor shall not be removed;
0x01005507 not be at the at the end position, 5. Check if the photocoupler
end position but the photocoupler is OK: see if the status
5-27
Troubleshooting and
Solution
of the end position is changes when blocked or
blocked, SMRM end not blocked;
position photocoupler 6. Once confirm which
or motor error photocoupler is bad,
luminous surface is blocked
by the dust or there is fluids
splashed on the surface;
the end position, but
not, replace the
The motor shall the photocoupler of
photocoupler;
0x01005508 be at the end the end position is not
position blocked, SMRM end
fail to move to the
or motor error
happen).
1. Check if each software
and hardware version is
correct；

Current mix
connected properly, such as
mechanism action is
Current mix if the wires of the motor and
not allowed (Since at
mechanism photocoupler are reliable, if
0x01005606 least one of the 3
action is not the label of sensor wires
motors in the mix
allowed match the sensor positions,
mechanism are not at
if the labels of motor wires
the initial position)
match the motor position.
removed;
5-28
Troubleshooting and
Solution
removed;
5. Check if the photocoupler
changes when blocked or
not blocked;
luminous surface is blocked
by the dust or there is fluids
splashed on the surface;
not, replace the
photocoupler;
fail to move to the
happen).
5-29
 Autoloading feeding
Troubleshooting and
Solution
X loading motor Software transmit and autoloader are correct
0x01005700
analyzer
1. Check if the
luminous surface is
The photocoupler of X blocked by the dust or
loading motor initial there is fluids splashed on
X Loading motor
0x01005701 position, shall be the surface;
action error
blocked but it is not 3.Wipe the surface of the
blocked. photocoupler and install it
photocoupler;
4. Remove the error.
5. Check if there are
interferences between the
loading and autoloading
cover
1. Check if there is tube
rack at the tube rack
position;
2. Remove the error;
X loading motor X Loading Motor
removed, check if the micro
0x01005702 current action is current action is not
switch is OK, see if the
not allowed allowed
status changes when
4. Check if the wires of the
micro switch are connected
properly;
5-30
Troubleshooting and
Solution
removed, replace the micro
switch
1. Check the current
position of the loading unit;
2. If it is between the initial
position and end position,
a. Check if there are
interferences in the loading
pathway, such as cover
The loading motor is
interference, foreign
at the initial position,
materials on the load
but the end position
platform, if the tube rack is
photocoupler is
X Loading motor placed properly; b. If there
0x01005703 blocked; The loading
action error 2 is no interference, check if
is at the end position,
the motor and the wires are
but the end position
OK;
photocoupler is not
3. If it is at the initial
blocked
position or end position,
check if the photocoupler is
OK: see if the status
changes when blocked or
not blocked; see if the
wires of the photocoupler
are connected properly.
The initial position
photocoupler and end
X loading motor match the sensor positions.
0x01005704 photocoupler 2. Check if there is foreign
at the loading platform
error material between the two
are blocked at the
photocouplers;
same time
removed;
5-31
Troubleshooting and
Solution
removed;
5. Check if the
luminous surface is
the surface;；

photocoupler;
1.There is not tube rack on
the load platform : it maybe
X load end position
photocoupler error, check if
the end position
photocoupler is OK
2. There is tube rack on the
load platform;
a. The tube rack does not
After the loading, if the
press the micro switch:
loading end position
Check if there is foreign
X loading motor photocoupler and the
materials or interference on
0x01005705 photocoupler tube rack test micro
the load platform, if the
error switch are not
rack is placed properly, or
blocked, report the
the foreign material forbid
error
the rack to press the micro
switch;
b. The tube rack presses
the micro switch, it maybe
micro switch error, check if
the micro switch is OK
3. If the above are OK, it
maybe load motor error,
check if the load motor and
5-32
Troubleshooting and
Solution
its wires are OK
1. During the
troubleshooting, please
ensure that the wires
relevant to the error are
connected properly, check
if the wires of the
photocoupler are reliable,
check if the labels of the
sensor match the position
of the sensor;
FX_READY micro 2. Check if there is foreign
switch error, it shall be material in the
Loading micro
0x01005708 pressed, but in the photocoupler;
switch error
real test, it is of 3. Check if the error can be
pressed status removed by clicking the
Remove error button
6. Check if the
photocoupler is OK; Check
if the status changes when
7. Check if the
photocoupler is bad, the
mechanism is aged, check
if it can be pressed and
ejected;
Y loading motor Software transmit and autoloader are correct
0x01005900
analyzer
There is tube rack at
Y motor the rack feeding
0x01005901 initialization direction, once initiate
forbidden the count, error is 1.Take out the rack
reported 2. Remove the error
The photocoupler of 1. Confirm that the
the unloading tray is photocoupler of the unload
Unloading
0x01005902 blocked, it indicates tray is blocked, remove the
action error
the unloading tray is tube rack on the unload
full tray;
5-33
Troubleshooting and
Solution
2. There is no tube rack on
the unload tray, check if the
photocoupler and its wires
are OK
correct；

as if the wires of the motor
and photocoupler are
reliable, if the label of
sensor wires match the
sensor positions, if the
labels of motor wires match
the motor position.
Y feed initial position
photocoupler shall be
removed;
blocked but instead
Y feed motor 4. Click Feeding Unit
0x01005903 not blocked; or if it
action error self-test at the self-test
shall not be blocked
but instead it is
removed;
blocked
5. Check if the
6. Check which
luminous surface is
the surface;
photocoupler;
5-34
Troubleshooting and
Solution
happen).
correct；

match the sensor positions.
Unload initial position button to see if it is
photocoupler shall be removed;
Unloading
blocked but instead 4. Click Feeding Unit
position
0x01005904 not blocked; or if it self-test at the self-test
photocoupler
shall not be blocked screen to see if it is
error
but instead it is removed;
blocked 5. Check if the unload
mechanism action is
normal, check if the gear is
working normally, if it does
not extend or does not
extend to the photocoupler,
check the mechanism;
6. Check if the
5-35
Troubleshooting and
Solution
luminous surface is
the surface;
photocoupler;
Y right photocoupler 1. Check if each software
shall be blocked but and hardware version is
Y right
instead not blocked;
0x01005905 photocoupler correct；
or if it shall not be
error
blocked but instead it 2. When checking the error,
is blocked ensure that the relevant
sensor wires match the
sensor positions, if the
labels of motor wires match
the motor position.
Y left photocoupler
removed;
shall be blocked but
Y left 4. Click Feeding Unit
instead not blocked;
0x01005906 photocoupler self-test at the self-test
or if it shall not be
error screen to see if it is
blocked but instead it
removed;
is blocked
5. Check if the
6. Check which
luminous surface is
the surface;
5-36
Troubleshooting and
Solution
photocoupler;
happen).
correct；

Y feed initial sensor wires match the
photocoupler is not sensor positions, if the
Y feed motor blocked, it indicates it labels of motor wires match
0x01005908
feed error is not at initial the motor position.
position, feeding is not 3. Click the remove error
allowed button to see if it is
removed;
4. Click Feeding Unit
removed;
5. Check if the
6. Check which
5-37
Troubleshooting and
Solution
luminous surface is
the surface;
photocoupler;
happen).
If the following error
occurs during the
unload process, report 1. Confirm the Y feed initial
the error photocoupler and unload
1. Y feed initial initial position status, check
Y feed motor position photocoupler if the two photocouplers
0x01005909
unload error is not blocked and their wires are OK;
2. Unload initial 2. Check if there is
position photocoupler inference when the tube
is not blocked rack is feeding, which
3. Left photocoupler cause the rack fails to pass
counter is not 0 the left photocoupler totally
1. Check if the tube rack is
the 3106 specified rack
2. Check if the tube rack
During the rack
pathway is smooth;
Y left and right feeding process, the
3. Check if the left and right
photocoupler left and right
0x0100590D photocoupler and its wires
cooperation photocouplers jump
error abnormally, which is are OK；
illogical.
4. Check if the installation
of the photocoupler barrier
is OK
5-38
Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. Check if the tube racks
with tube are placed at the
tube testing position
manually;
2. If not, check if the tube
testing photocoupler is OK:
place tube at the tube
testing position, see if the
After the
After the initialization, photocoupler changes
initialization, the
the tube testing normally when blocked or
0x0100590F tube testing
photocoupler is not blocked;
photocoupler is
blocked 3. Check if there is foreign
blocked
materials of the L
photocoupler testing
pathway;
4. Wipe the photocoupler
and see if it is normal;
5. If not, replace the
reagent testing
photocoupler
1. Check if the tube rack
feed channel is smooth, or
if there is foreign material
impede the rack to move;
2. Check if the software
correct;
The action is
3. Check if the wires of the
performed for 5 times
The right right photocoupler are
but the right
photocoupler is connected reliably and
photocoupler does not
damaged or the there are no damaged;
0x01005910 jump, the right
tube rack 3. Check if the right
photocoupler may be
cannot be photocoupler is OK; press
damaged or the tube
moved the photocoupler blade,
rack cannot be
check if the photocoupler
dragged.
status is normal;
4. Check if the assembly of
the photocoupler barrier is
OK, check if the
photocoupler is block when
pressed;
5. Replace the wires, check
5-39
Troubleshooting and
Solution
if the photocoupler is
normal;
6. Replace the
photocoupler
Width of the 1. Check whether any
pulse generated foreign matter sticks to the
During tube rack
by the right bottom of the tube rack.
feeding, the width of
photocoupler for 2. Check whether the
0x01005911 the right counter
detecting tube barcode label stuck to the
photocoupler pulse
rack movement tube is easily to stretch, this
exceeds 250 ms.
exceeds the could cause stagnation of
upper threshold the tube rack.
1. Check whether the right
counter is stagnated.
No pulse of the The right counter 2. Press and then loose the
right photocoupler does not right counter, and check
0x01005912 photocoupler for generate any pulse whether the status of the
detecting tube during the tube rack right counter photocoupler
rack movement feeding. changes. If the status does
not change, the counter
photocoupler is faulty.
1. Check whether this
happens because
someone manually
dragged or touched the
tube rack.
Abnormal 2. Check whether any
excessive foreign matter sticks to the
pulses The number of pluses bottom of the tube rack.
generated by generated by the right 3. Check whether the
0x01005913 the right photocoupler is more barcode label stuck to the
photocoupler than one during the tube is easily to stretch,
counter for tube rack feeding. this could cause stagnation
detecting tube of the tube rack.
rack movement 4. If the fault occurs
accidentally and cannot be
cleared, replace the right
counter photocoupler to
check whether this fault is
cleared.
Width of the During tube rack 1. Check whether any
0x01005914
pulse generated feeding, the width of foreign matter sticks to the
5-40
Troubleshooting and
Solution
by the left the pulse generated bottom of the tube rack.
photocoupler for by the left 2. Check whether the
detecting tube photocoupler counter barcode label stuck to the
rack movement exceeds 250 ms. tube is easily to stretch,
exceeds the this could cause stagnation
upper threshold of the tube rack.
1. Check whether the left
counter is stagnated.
No pulse is
The left photocoupler 2. Press and then loose the
generated by
counter does not left counter, and check
the left
0x01005915 generated any pulse whether the status of the
photocoupler for
during the tube rack left counter photocoupler
detecting tube
feeding. changes. If the status does
rack movement
not change, the counter
photocoupler is faulty.
happens because
someone manually
Abnormal dragged or touched the
excessive tube rack.
number of 2. Check whether any
The number of pluses
pulses foreign matter sticks to the
generated by the left
generated by bottom of the tube rack.
photocoupler counter
0x01005916 the left 3. Check whether the
is more than one
photocoupler barcode label stuck to the
during the tube rack
counter for tube is easily to stretch,
feeding.
detecting tube this could cause stagnation
rack movement of the tube rack.
excessive 4. If the fault occurs
accidentally and cannot be
cleared, replace the left
counter photocoupler.
The system detects 1. Check whether the
that the photocoupler barcode label stuck to the
at the initial feeding tube is easily to stretch, this
position has already could cause stagnation of
Feeding motor been triggered when the tube rack.
0x01005917
loses steps the feeding assembly 2. Check whether the
is returning to the height of the tube fixing
initial position after plate over the tube clamp is
feeding the tube rack higher than the vertical
one position ahead. back plate.
5-41
Troubleshooting and
Solution
This indicates that the
feeding motor loses
steps when feeding
the the tube rack one
position ahead.
1. The user may have
placed two tubes with the
same barcode in two
The system detects adjacent positions in the
the same sample tube rack. If the user
barcode on two needs to place two tubes
Barcodes of two adjacent tubes in the with the same barcode in
0x01005918 adjacent tubes tube rack. This fault one row of tube rack, place
are the same. could be reported only these two tubes in two
by equipment that is positions that are not
installed with a adjacent.
scanner. 2. The tube rack may be
stagnated during tube
feeding. Please
troubleshoot accordingly.
The left or right happens because
counter photocoupler someone manually draged
generates a pulse or touched the tube rack.
The tube rack when the feeding 2. Check whether the two
0x01005919 moves assembly is returning pawls on the feeding
unexpectedly. to its initial position assembly rotate smoothly.
after feeding the tube If the pawls get rusty
rack one position because of liquid leakage,
ahead. they fail to rotate smoothly,
the fault occurs.
5-42
 Sample compartment and others
Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. . Check if the software,
autoloader board MCU and
FPGA version are correct,
check if the 4V, 12V and 5V
voltage of the autoloader
power are correct;
2. Check if the compartment
door is opened, if yes,
checks if the compartment
door tests photocoupler and
Open the
Fail to open the its wires are OK;
0x01005a01 compartment
compartment door 3. If the door is not opened,
door failed
check if the wires of the
electromagnet are
connected reliably;
4. Open the compartment
door manually, see if there is
interference or resistance
Note, ensure that the sample
probe is not in the
compartment when open or
close the door
adjustment The error only appears
During the debug, the
parameter during the production or
0x01005a04 adjustment is out of
setting out of position adjustment by the
range, report the error
range customer service, readjust
1. Check if the software,
autoloader board MCU and
FPGA version are correct,
check if the 4V, 12V and 5V
Scanner reading error, voltage of the autoloader
Scanner reading there is no information power are correct;
0x01005a05
error return value within 2. Check if the wires of the
500ms scanner are reliable;
3. Restart the device, see if
the error still exists;
4. If the error is still reported,
replace the scanner
5-43
 Autoloader board communication
Error Troubleshooting and

Error ID Error Name
Mechanism Solution
0x01005801 functional code 1. Check if the autoloader
error version information is correct;
0x01005802 Data length error 2. Check if the wires between
0x01005803 command label the autoloader board and
error Data Board;
0x01005804 Check code error 3. See if it is normal after
0x01005805 End code error restarting;
0x01005806 Identity code 4. If the error cannot be
error removed, replace the
0x01005820 FPGA download Autoloader board.
symbol error
0x01005821 FPGA download
command error
0x01005822 The read and
write
configuration chip
address exceeds
the range
0x01005823 The write data
number exceeds Communication
the maximum abnormal
limit
0x01005824 The written
numbers and first
address does not
match the page
capacity
0x01005825 The written
operation is not
allowed
0x01005826 FPGA written
operation
overtime
0x01005a00 EEPROM writing
data ineffective Replace autoloader board
5-44
5.1.8 Reagent test type

Troubleshooting and
Solution
Test if the diluent
Click the "Reagent"
reagent is expired
0x01003070 Expired reagent button, load the valid
after starting up and
reagent information
10:00 every morning
Test if the LH reagent
Click the "Reagent"
is expired after
0x01003071 HGB lyse expired button, load the valid
starting up and 10:00
reagent information
every morning
Test if the LEOI
Click the "Reagent"
DIFF1 lyse reagent is expired
0x01003072 button, load the valid
expired after starting up and
reagent information
10:00 every morning
Test if the LEOII
Click the "Reagent"
DIFF2 lyse reagent is expired
0x01003073 button, load the valid
expired after starting up and
reagent information
10:00 every morning
0x01003096 Diluent 1. The software
insufficient records the remain
reagent is less than
Click the Remove error
-20% of the total
button, load the new valid
amount;2.The
reagent in the prompt
hardware reports
reagent box and perform
there is no reagent,
reagent replacing
the software records
the remain reagent is
less than 3%
0x01003097 HGB lyse 1. The software
-20% of the total
amount;2.The
hardware reports
reagent replacing
less than 3%
0x01003098 DIFF1 lyse 1. The software Click the Remove error
insufficient records the remain button, load the new valid
reagent is less than reagent in the prompt
-20% of the total reagent box and perform
5-45
Troubleshooting and
Solution
amount;2.The reagent replacing
hardware reports
less than 3%
0x01003099 DIFF2 lyse 1. The software
-20% of the total
amount;2.The
hardware reports
reagent replacing
less than 3%
1. Check if the waste
container is full;
2. Check if the float
sensor is at reliable
floating status.
0x01003085 Waste full Waste full connectors of the waste
sensor is OK.
4. Check if the connector
of the waste sensor on
the drive board is OK;
5. Replace the waste
sensor
1. Check if the diluent
container is full;
2. Check if the float
sensor is at reliable
floating status.
0x01003080 No diluent No diluent connectors of the diluent
sensor is OK.
4. Check if the connector
of the diluent sensor on
the drive board is OK;
5. Replace the diluent
float sensor.
5-46
Troubleshooting and
Solution
between the reagent
testing board and the
driver board are
connecting reliably and
properly;
7. Check if the reagent
sensor is OK;
8. Replace the reagent
testing board
0x01003081 No HGB lyse No HGB lyse 1. Check if the reagents
0x01003082 No DIFF1 lyse No DIFF1 lyse are used up;
between the reagent
testing board and the
driver board are
connecting reliably and
properly;
3. Check if the reagent
sensor is OK;
4. Replace the reagent
0x01003083 No DIFF2 lyse No DIFF2 lyse testing board
5.1.9 Flow cell clog

Troubleshooting and
Solution
removed by clicking the
remove error button, it
indicates the photocoupler
of the relieve valve is
blocked, the following
During the sequence
treatments are
running process, the
0x01000611 Flow cell clog recommended:
relieve valve is
1. a Ensure that it is not
block/not block
under the development
access, if yes, change the
access and perform
fluidics initialization
1. b Check if the
photocoupler of the relieve
5-47
Troubleshooting and
Solution
valve is blocked,
1.b.1 If yes, disconnect the
pipe at both ends of the
relieve valve
1.b.1.1 If it is still blocked,
it indicates the relieve
valve error, please replace
it
1.b.1.2 If not, the relieve
valve is normal, there may
be error in other places
1.b.2 If not, it indicates the
circuit error, it maybe
photocoupler or wires
problems
1.c Check if there are
errors at the pinch valve
PV28 and its pinch pipes,
move the pinch valve
manually and see if the
pinch pipe is folded.
1.d Check if the fluids
adding inlet of the DIFF
bath is clogged. If error is
reported after continuous
testing, this step can be
skipped, if error is reported
after startup, or there is
maintenance in the
previous period or there is
error untreated before
shutting down, which need
to be confirmed. Perform
probe cleaner soak for 5
min
1.e Check if the valve V15
can be opened and closed
normally, or the tube TT39
and T40 are folded
2. If the error can be
removed, but "Flow cell
clog" error is reported in
5-48
Troubleshooting and
Solution
the next count
2.a It is recommended to
perform flow cell
unclogging and DIFF
channel Probe Cleanser
Maintenance, if the error
still exists, it is
recommended to perform
per the order of the
suggestions.
2.b The valve V18 cannot
be opened normally or it is
clogged or the pipes
around the V18 is folded,
pay special attention to the
T24 and T22;
2.b The valve V17 cannot
be opened normally or it is
clogged or the pipes
around the V17 is folded,
pay special attention to the
T26;
2.c The flow cell is
clogged by the foreign
materials, draw out the
flow cell manually with the
syringe, if the device is
installed recently or it is
place still for a long time, it
is suggested to check this
item.
2.c The reset of the relieve
valve is too small, the
cover is damaged and the
spring is rusted, if the
device is installed recently
or it is place still for a long
time, it is suggested to
check this item.
5-49
5.1.10 Background abnormal

Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. If it is the diluent error,
ensure that there is no
2. If the analyzer has
been idle for a long time
The background test and cannot be shut down
during the startup with other abnormal
Background
0x01002000 exceeds the range operation, please perform
abnormal
specified in the Fluidics probe cleanser
corporate standard. maintenance and Fluidics
cleaning
3. If the user can operate
the device normally,
perform fluidics cleaning.
5.1.11 HGB abnormal

Troubleshooting and
Solution
1. When the count
starts, the HGB
voltage exceeds the
HGB blank range of [3.2V,4.9V].
0x01003060
voltage abnormal 2. When the device is
idle, the HGB voltage
exceeds the range of
[3.2V,4.9V].
5.1.12 Clog
Troubleshooting and
Solution
0x01002010 WBC Clog During the counting 1. Perform "Zap
process, all or part of Apertures", "Flush
the apertures are Apertures" and "Unclog"
clogged, which results operation for several
in the aperture flow times.
0x01002030 RBC Clog
become slower and 2. If the clog error cannot
aperture voltage be removed, perform
higher which report "Probe Cleanser
the clog error. Maintenance".
5-50
Troubleshooting and
Solution
3. If the clog error cannot
be removed, add the
probe cleanser into the
bath directly and soak for
10 minutes.
4. If the clog error cannot
be removed, then take off
the aperture and soak it in
the probe cleanser and
clean the aperture
manually.
5-51
6 Fluidic System
6.1 Analysis Flow

The fluidic system of the analyzer contains 3 analyzing channels.
 DIFF & optical channel
 WBC&HGB channel
 RBC&PLT channel
The system flow chart of whole blood CD mode is as follows: (there is no DIFF or optical
channel of the CBC mode)
Figure 6-1 Fluidic system flow chart (whole blood CD mode)
The system flow chart of predilute CD mode is as follows: (there is no DIFF or optical channel
of the CBC mode)
6-1
Fluidic System
Figure 6-2 Fluidic system flow chart (predilute CD mode)
6.1.1 WBC&HGB channel

WBC analysis
 Reagents used:
 M-53LH lyse: dissolves RBC, PLT, and differentiates basophils from other WBCs by
size.
 Diluent: cleans the system, and provides environment for reaction and analysis.
 Analysis principle: the impedance method
 Analysis parameters:WBC, BASO#, BASO%
 Graph information:WBC histogram
 Dilution ratio:1:500*1
 Analysis duration: 12s
 Analysis pressure: -32kpa
1Dilution ratio in this chapter refers to the dilution ratio of whole blood mode, if not otherwise
stated.
6-2
Fluidic System
 Measuring volume: the measuring volume is controlled by controlling the vacuum

and analysis duration. The stability of vacuum shall be ensured so that the aperture
flow can be stable, thus the measuring volume can be calculated by controlling the
analysis duration.
 Function description: 6μl of blood, 2.5ml of diluent and 0.5ml of LH lyse are mixed
and reacted in the counting bath, and then the compound is aspirated into the back
bath via the aperture by vacuum of the vacuum chamber, the cells are analyzed
when they passes the aperture.
HGB analysis
 Reagents used:
 Diluent: for dilution and cleaning
 LH lyse: dissolves RBCs and bonds HGB
 Analysis principle: colorimetric method
 Analysis parameter:HGB
 Dilution ratio:1:500
The analysis principle of HGB channel is colorimetric method. By comparing the scatter light
intensity of the diluent and the sample, the HGB concentration can be obtained.
6.1.2 DIFF & optical channel

 Reagents used:
 LEO(I), LEO(II) lyse: dissolves RBCs, and differentiates WBCs.
 Diluent: for cleaning and forming of sheath fluid.
 Analysis principle: flow cytometry, semi-conductive laser scatter method
 Analysis parameter: MONO#, MONO%, LYMPH#, LYMPH %, NEUT#, NEUT%, EOS#

and EOS%.
 Graph information: 4-DIFF scattergram
 Analysis flow: 0.0077216ml/s
 Measuring volume: the sample flow is stable, by controlling the analysis duration,
the measuring volume can be calculated.
 Function description: 0.6ml of Leo(I) lyse is dispensed to wash the DIFF bath, then
1.1 ml of Leo(I)lyse is added before 9μl of blood is dispensed. 0.135ml of Leo(II) lyse
is added after the blood and Leo(I) react for a while. After a while again, the sample
will be delivered to below the flow cell, the sheath fluid syringe is started to form
sheath fluid, and the sample syringe is started to push the sample into the flow cell
6-3
Fluidic System
for analysis.
6.1.3 RBC/PLT channel

 Reagents used:
 Diluent: for dilution, cleaning, providing conducting environment and isometric

processing of cells.
 Analysis principle: the impedance method
 Analysis parameters: RBC, PLT
 Graph information: RBC histogram, PLT histogram
 Analysis pressure: -32kpa
 Measuring volume: the measuring volume is controlled by controlling the vacuum

and analysis duration. The stability of vacuum shall be ensured so that the aperture
flow can be stable, thus the measuring volume can be calculated by controlling the
analysis duration.
 Function description: the sample probe aspirates 52.08μl of sample (dilution rate:
1: 417.7) from the WBC bath; the sample probe moves to RBC bath to mix the
sample with 2.5ml of diluent, the dilution rate of the sample is1:20000. The sample
is then aspirated into the bath back through the aperture by vacuum of the vacuum
chamber, the cells are analyzed when they pass the aperture.
6.2 Sample Volume

Table 6-1 Sample volume
Whole blood Capillary

Item Predilute mode
mode blood mode
Dilute 20uL of blood manually: 180uL of

CD mode 20L 20L
diluent, aspirate 80L
Dilute 20uL of blood manually: 180uL of
CBC mode 15L 15L
diluent, aspirate 40L
6-4
Fluidic System
6.3 Temperature Control of the Fluidic System

Table 6-2 Temperature control of the fluidic system
Preheating Reactio
Item Optical system
bath n bath
Target temperature ℃ 30 35 36
Alarming temperature ℃ ±6 ±5 ±1.5
6.4 Reagent Volume

Table 6-3 reagent volume
Loading mode Diluent LEO(I) LEO(II) HGB Probe

(ml) (ml) (ml) lyse cleanser
(ml) (ml)
Whole blood mode CBC 34 0 0 0.5 0
CD 45 1.7 0.14 0.5 0
Predilute mode CBC 31 0 0 0.5 0
CD 41 1.7 0.14 0.5 0
Shutdown 208 1.25 1.25 1.2 3.6
Normal startup 83 2 2 2 0
Startup after abnormal shutdown 130 3 3 3 0
Exit from standby status 1 13 0 0 0 0
Exit from standby status 2 65 0 0 0 0

Exit from standby status 3 98 0 0 0.25 0
6.5 Introduction of Fluidic Components

This section introduces the fluidic components and their functions, the symbols refers to the
symbols in the fluidic diagram.
6-5
Fluidic System
6.5.1 Mindray valves

 Symbols:
Two way Mindray valve Three way Mindray valve
 Appearance:
Two way Mindray valve Three way Mindray valve
Pin lift
 Function:
Two-way valve: connects and disconnects channels. When the electromagnetic valve is not
electrified, the input and output ports are blocked; when the electromagnetic valve is electrified,
the input and output ports are connected.
Three-way valve: switches channels. When the electromagnetic valve is not electrified, the
common port and normally open port are connected; when the electromagnetic valve is
electrified, the common port and normally closed port are connected.
 Note:
The working voltage of the Mindray valve is 12V, and the maximum pressure resistance is
200KPa. The Mindray valve works via the electromagnet, and restores by using spring, it shall
not be electrified for long term. When the electromagnetic valve is electrified, the pin-lift of the
valve goes down; when the valve is not electrified, the pin-lift restores. By touching the pin-lift,
you can feel its movement to judge its status.
6.5.2 Two-way pressureproof Mindray valve

 Symbols:
Same as the two-way valve
6-6
Fluidic System
 Appearance:
 Function:
Pressure resistance of the two-way pressureproof Mindray valve is greater than that of the
ordinary two-way Mindray valve, their operating principle is the same.
Note: Be sure to distinguish the ordinary two-way valve and the pressureproof two-way valve
when replacing the valves.
6.5.3 LVM fluidic valve

 Symbols:
Same as the Mindray valves
 Appearance:
Two-way LVM fluidic valve Three-way LVM fluidic valve
 Function:
Same as the Mindray valves. The pressure resistance of this valve is greater than that of the
two-way pressureproof Mindray valve, so it can adapt to greater temperature and pressure
change.
 Note:
Pressure resistance 200KPa, CV of the flow is about 0.03.
6-7
Fluidic System
6.5.4 Pinch valve

 Symbols:
PV28
 Appearance:
 Function:
Clamp type, on/off controlled by electromagnetic power. The valve controls the flow and break
of fluid.
6.5.5 Liquid filter

 Symbols:
6-8
Fluidic System
 Appearance:
LF1 LF2
 Function: filters the impurities in diluent.
 Note: LF1 is probe wipe filter, LF2 is sheath fluid filter.
6.5.6 Syringes
 Symbols:
A A
A
100ul/250ul 2.5ml 10ml
 Appearance: N/A.
 Function:
There are 5 types of syringes, there parameters and functions are as follows:
Table 6-4 List of syringe parameters and functions
Name Label Specification Function

The syringe aspirates fixed amount of blood
Aspirate Full range
Asp-Syringe sample and diluted sample, and dispense the
syringe 100μl
sample.
6-9
Fluidic System
Name Label Specification Function
The syringe dispenses fixed amount of diluent
Diluent Full to the WBC and RBC bath, provides diluent to

Dil-Syringe
syringe range10ml the probe wipe, and clean the sample probe
and counting bath.
Full range
2.5m l, 3
Lyse The syringe dispenses M-53Leo(I),
Lyse-Syringe syringe tubes
syringe M-53Leo(II) and M-53LH lyse.
are driven by
one motor.
The syringe pushes sheath fluid into flow cell,
cleans the flow cell, prepares sample and
Sheath
Full cleans the DIFF bath and inside of the sample
fluid Sh-Syringe
range10ml probe. It aspirates and dispenses probe
syringe
cleanser in probe cleanser maintenance
procedure.
Sample Full range The syringe pushes sample into the flow cell
Sp-Syringe
syringe 250μl for measurement.
6-10
Fluidic System
6.5.7 Pump
6.5.7.1Pressure pump
 Symbols:
GP
 Appearance:
 Function: provides pressure to the pressure chamber.
6.5.7.2Vacuum pump
 Symbols:
LP2
LP3
 Appearance:
 Function:
 LP2: the pump drains the DIFF bath and vacuum chamber, and generates vacuum of the
vacuum chamber.
 LP3: the pump drains the probe wipe, WBC bath and RBC bath.
6-11
Fluidic System
6.5.8 Sample probe

 Symbols:
 Appearance:
Closed tube sample probe
 Function:
Provides a corrosion resistant cavity, which is able to aspirate and dispense blood and probe
cleanser.
 Note:
The closed tube sample probe has piercing function, its probe tip is conical.
6-12
Fluidic System
6.5.9 Probe wipe

 Symbols:
 Appearance:
Closed tube probe wipe
 Function:
Provides a cavity to clean closed tube sample probe under the effect of liquid flow, and to
collect the waste produced.
 Note:
The closed tube probe wipe is consisted of 3 parts.
6-13
Fluidic System
6.5.10 Pressure relief valve

 Symbols:
RV
 Appearance:
Block plate
Photocouple
r
 Function:
Detects the pressure in the sheath fluid channel, when the pressure goes beyond specified
range, the photocoulper will be blocked, and alarm signal will be given.
6-14
Fluidic System
6.5.11 Baths
 WBC bath: the WBC bath is formed by the front bath, back bath and aperture. The
bath provides space for WBC sample mixing and reaction, HGB and WBC
measurement.
 RBC bath: the RBC bath is formed by the front bath, back bath and aperture. The
bath provide space for RBC sample mixing and reaction, RBC/PLT measurement.
 DIFF reaction bath: provides space for DIFF sample mixing and reaction, and
provides prepared DIFF sample.
 Vacuum chamber: generates and stores stable vacuum for WBC and RBC
impedance counting, cleans the back bath, and drains the flow cell when is it
clogged to remove impurities.
 Pressure chamber: generates and stores stable pressure for bubble generation of
the baths and aperture flushing.
 WBC isolating chamber: provides room to block interference signals from

outside.
 RBC isolating chamber: provides room to block interference signals from outside
6-15
Fluidic System
6.6 Introduction of Fluidic Structure

See the following fluidic structure diagram:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MRSZ/R05N01.291.01（2.0）
SV18
C84 (T23)
C15 J19-T24-J20
J44-T174-J45 T175 J1-T11-J2 C81 C80 C45 C49 DILUENT
T170 T169 T4
A C14
DIL
T25 C46 C50 LEO（I） LYSE
T7 T3
DIFF bath LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
C83 C1 C47 C51
J40-T15-J12
T6 T2
SV17
J17-T22-J18
LEO(II)
LF2 C2 C48 C52 LH LYSE
(T21)
J3-T12 -J4 T5 T1
C12 C13 C77
T164
LH
T131
J25-T26-J26
T173
T30 T31 T28 T29
T27
Flow cell
T49
Fold the strip to fasten it

Reagent
RV SV04 SV05 SV06 detection
SV15 Transducer
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T171
T172
J7-T39-J8 J21-T40-J22 T16 T73 -T132
T8
C37
T10
T134
C26 T43 J16-T17-J41 C82 T133 T71 T72 PC
T9
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41 C16

SV14 J23-T42-J24 GP T74
SV16
J9-T13-J10
J15
B T36 C27 GF2
T35
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T41
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
Isolating chamber 1
T47
C68
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T140
T155
SV08
C5 SV09
J31-T137-J32
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78 T68
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
C42 Transducer C69 C24
SV13
T146 Fold the strip to fasten it

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
C
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
C44 T50 C8 C38

T57
T63
T153
DH 名称:
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
T66
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T163
T53
T67
T55
(T148)
J37-T52-J38
T51
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
D RBC C22 SV20 C73

WBC SV21
T85
C20 T104 C33
T92
C32 T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
T103 C54
T91 C58
T127
T105 C56 C57 C60
LEO(II) reagent
T93
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
T144
T87
LH reagent
container
container
T143
container
T141
T142
J29-T101-J30
J27-T89-J28
(T100)
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding cover Bath shielding cover C31 T86

SV12 SV11
LF1
Probe T126 C34

T97 T109 T111
wipe
T98 T110
T112
T123
T113
T99
Isolating Isolating chamber 3

T114 C35
C62 C61 chamber 2
E C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
F 保密:此图及其全部知识产权(含著作权)归深圳迈瑞生物医疗电子股份有限公司所有。未经深圳迈瑞生物医疗电子股份有限公司预先书面许可,严禁出于任何目的,对此图的全部或部分内容(包括但不限于图中信息、数据、运算结果等)泄露、使用、拷贝或复制。
Classified documents, This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No disclosure,use,copies or reproductions
should be made of this drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents contained in this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray
Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd
6-16
Fluidic System
6.6.1 Sample aspiration and dispensing channel

The structure of the sample aspiration and dispensing channel is as follows:
C36
T45
T46
SV14 Diluent
SV13
T57
C64 SV01 SV03 SV02
T150
C65
T149
T163
C76 T53
T34 T55
T48
T47
C44 T50
T56
C27
J37-T52-
J38
T35 T51
T162 ASP(100uL)
C28
T36
DIL(10mL)
C29
T37
T127
C75
SPB
SH(10mL)
T123
T126
LF1 Waste
Probe pump
wipe
Major functions:
Sample aspiration and dispensing. The ASP syringe and sample probe SPB works together to
aspirate 20uL of blood2, and dispenses 9uL, 6uL and 52.08uL of blood sample respectively.
Cleaning inside and outside of the sample probe. Cleaning inside of the sample probe can be
done by DIL syringe, SV01, 02, and 03 valves working together, it can also be done by SH
syringe, SV13 and 14 valves working together. Cleaning outside of the sample probe is done
by DIL syringe, SV02 and 03 valves working together. Waste is collected by the probe wipe
and waste pump.
Aspiration and dispensing probe cleanser. When aspirating probe cleanser, SV13 and SV14 is
electrified, the SH syringe aspirates 3.6mL of probe cleanser from the sample probe SPB. The
probe cleanser is stored in the reservoir T47 (marked in red in the figure above). When
dispensing probe cleanser, the sample aspirating assembly delivers the sample probe to the
reaction baths (DIFF, WBC and RBC bath), SV13 and SV14 is electrified, the SH syringe
dispenses certain amount of probe cleanser to the counting bath.
 refers to whole blood CD mode. The sample aspiration volume of whole blood CBC mode is 15uL,
and for predilute CD and CBC mode, 80uL and 40uL of diluted sample shall be aspirated respectively. If
not otherwise stated, it refers to whole blood CD mode in the following text.
6-17
Fluidic System
6.6.2 WBC&HGB channel

The structure of the WBC&HGB channel is as follows:
The blue lines are the flowing paths of diluent, the peach lines are the flowing paths of lyse,
and the wine lines are the sample flowing paths (this rule applies to all following figures in this
chapter).
C67
T153
T152
J9-T13-
J10
DH T58
SV07 C2
C66
T151
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02
T5 C52 C48
T53 T1
T55
T49
SV04
WBC
J31-T137-
C20 SV22
T56
T92
C32 diluent
J32
T90 Reagent
T10
T96
T61
T94
detection
T57
T91 SV21Vacuum
Diluent T93 T95
C21
T62chamber C53
DIL(10mL)
C56
Bath shielding
J27-T89-
Pressur
(T88)
LH reagent
SV12 e
J28
cover
container
T141
chamber
T114
Waste
T97 SV23
Isolating pump
T157
T117
T99
T98 LYSE(2.5mLX3)
chamber 2 C70
6.6.2.1WBC analysis
The diluent syringe dispenses diluent into the WBC bath along the blue paths, the sample
probe dispenses blood sample into the WBC bath, and the lyse syringe dispenses LH lyse into
the WBC bath along the peach paths. The sample, diluent and lyse are mixed by bubbles
generated by the pressure chamber via SV12, and aspirated into the back bath by vacuum via
the aperture (wine lines). The calls are measured when they passes the aperture, and the
sample volume is calculated from the analysis duration. After analysis, the WBC bath is
drained by SV23 and the waste pump.
6.6.2.2HGB analysis
The analysis principle of the HGB channel is colorimetric method. By comparing the intensity
of the transmitted light through the background and the blood, the HGB concentration can be
obtained. The intensity of the transmitted light through the diluent is detected first, and during
WBC analysis, the intensity of the transmitted light through the blood sample is detected, the
ratio of the two intensity values is the HGB result.
6-18
Fluidic System
6.6.3 DIFF & optical channel

The structure of the DIFF & optical channel is as follows:
C15 J19-T24- J1-T11-
SV17 J20 J2
C13 T25 C14 C46 C50

SV18 T7 T3
J39-T14 -
T31 T28 T29
J11
J40-T15-
LF2 DIFF bath C1 C47 C51
T6
J12
J25-T26- T2
T131
(T21)
J26 J3-T12 -
SV0 SV0
J35-T139-
C12 C48 C52
T27
J4
6
J36
C77 Flow 5
T164
T30
J17-T22-
cell
J33-T138-
Reagent
J18
T8
T9
J34
RV SV15 detection
T32
J7-T39-
J42-T165- PV28
J8 J21-T40- T16 C54 C55
SV14
J43
J22 T44 C57 C58
T34 J16-T17-
LEO(I) reagent
T33
C26 T43
J41 C25
T45
container
C29
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T142
diluent
J23-T42-
J5-T18 -
T35
T38 J24
J6
C28
T41
T36
C27 SV16
T37
T47
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
C64
SV1
T149
Pressur
SP(250uL)
0
SV08
C4 J13-T20- e
T69
T19
SH(10mL)
J14 chambe
T68
SV13 Waste
r
T160
Isolating
T87
chamber 1 pump
SV27
T166
Vacuum
chamber
Figure 6-1
Leo(I) lyse is dispensed into the DIFF bath by lyse syringe via T11, Leo(II) lyse is dispensed
into the DIFF bath by lyse syringe via T12. Bubbles are dispensed from the pressure chamber
to DIFF bath via SV10, after reaction, the sample is transmitted under the flow cell. The sheath
fluid syringe is started to form sheath fluid along the blue lines in the figure. The sample is
driven to the flow cell for analysis by the sample syringe. After the analysis, the sheath fluid
syringe cleans the flow cell and sample preparing tubes along the blue lines in the figure. The
DIFF bath is drained by waste pump and SV27.
6.6.4 RBC/PLT channel

The structure of the RBC/PLT channel is as follows:
C67
T153
T152
DH T58
SV07
C66
T151
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02
T53
T55
RBC C20 SV19

T56
T92
C32 diluent
T90
T96
T61
T94
T57
T91 SV20Vacuum
diluent T93 T95
C21
T62chamber
DIL(10mL)
Bath shielding
J27-T89-
Pressur
(T88)
SV11 e
J28
cover
chamber
T114
Waste
T97 SV24
Isolating pump
T157
T117
T99
T98
chamber 2 C70
Figure 6-2
6-19
Fluidic System
The diluent syringe dispenses diluent into the RBC bath along the blue paths, the sample
probe dispenses diluted blood sample into the RBC bath. The sample and diluent are mixed by
bubbles generated by the pressure chamber via SV11, and aspirated into the back bath by
vacuum via the aperture (wine lines). The calls are measured when they passes the aperture,
and the sample volume is calculated from the analysis duration. After analysis, the RBC bath is
drained by SV24 and the waste pump.
6.7 Introduction of Sequences

The sequences of open vial whole blood CBC+DIFF mode will be introduce as an example.
6.7.1 Analysis sequence of closed tube whole blood

CBC+DIFF mode
The analysis sequence of closed tube whole blood mode is consisted of 2 parts.
Pre-piercing sequence, 10s
Primary analysis sequence, 60s
The diagram of the analysis sequences is as follows.
6-20
Fluidic System
0 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
1.24
SNH-MOTOR SNH-MOTOR
1.33 1.9 2.9 5.556.15
SNV-MOTOR SNV-MOTOR
5.9
15.2 15.8 18.3 47.1
Sample probe
7.65 7.6 20.2 12.5 22.95
ASP- +2 5 +2 14 +3 5
+20 5 -9 11 -0.5 3 -6 5 -9 14 +52.08 ASP-
14 INIT 14
SYRINGE SYRINGE
V01 1.65 1.92 22.85 25.45 V01
V03 14.5 20.1 25.8
2.95 5.6 9.5 2.8 4.98 6.6 9.4 10.8 V03
16.9 21.9 27.6
V02 47.5
1.65 1.92 2.95 5.6 9.5 2.8 4.98 6.6 9.4 27.6 43.8 45.6 V02
51.1
V13 4.45 5.2 15 16.8 V13
V07 17.4 19 49.4 51.1 V07
V25 1.2
9.5 3.3 4.98 6.6 9.1 11.3 14.1 17.4 19.7 22.4
25.4 V25
1.3 1.68 7.355.25 5.7 0.0 5.0 6.3 6.65 14.6 20.2
27.5 27.2
25.9 38 43.8 46.2 47.6
3 +200 9.5 11.6 16.1 17.5 22.95 +200 49.6
+2001.95
8 4 -2300 7 8 5 -1300
+50 3 +4500 -1647.92 -800 2 -700 6 8 INIT 13
DIL-SYRINGE +1550 15
-1600 6 8 +7650 13 -850 6+100 8 -2500 -600 5 -450 6 10 7
-4100 13 DIL-SYRINGE
-200 6 13 +2300
-100 8 -800 6 10 +8550 10 -4100 13
15. 15. 16. 17. 19.7 13
3.5 4.1 4.5 6.7 43.7 45.3 46.8 49 50.7
-300 5 3.7 1 7 2 2 5
SH-SYRINGE +450 9
-150 5 -300 -450 -7758 2
+1900 10
-1290 7
-1900 +1650 10 INIT 7 SH-SYRINGE
+1200 3 8
+8500 15 7 +250 7
-150 8 +150 8
7
V16 0 3.6 20.6 21.2 46.7 47.4 V16
V15 43.6 V15
17.15 19.7 46.7 48.6 50.6 53.2
45.2
V14 4.45 5.2 15 16.7 17.15 19.7
20.5
46.7 48.6 50.6 53.2 V14
45.2
V17 20.05 48.6 50.6 53.2 V17
V18 20.3 V18
42.7
V28 0 3.8
19.6 V28
0.3 42
4 51.1
DIFF 20.5 21.8
-140 2
INIT 5
SP-SYRINGE +190 12 SP-SYRINGE
+20 14 -60 14
0 2.8 4.2 6.7 12 15 17 20.7 40 49.6 50.7
LYSE- -145 14 INIT 5
+2000 14
-1100 14 +600 11 +50 5 +20 1 LYSE-
-600 -10 11 -50 9 -520 11
SYRINGE SYRINGE
14
V06 2.8 3.8 6.6 8.7 V06
V05 4.1 4.7 11.9 13 49.6 50.6 V05
V27 0 1.5 4.5 6
25.4
23.5 35.2 40.5 46.7 48.6 49.6 V27
27.7
V10 8.1 V10
13.9
DIFF_COUNT 34 DIFF_COUNT
50
V23 6.1 9.1
42.2 45.4 V23
43.8 47.6
V12 13.5 V12
4.6 5.1 20.5 23.6 44.9 45.4
16.1
V04 20.6 21.53 V04
V22 53.65 56.5 V22
WBC V21 26.2
53.65 56.5 V21
42.1
WBC_COUNT 28.9 WBC_COUNT
40.9
HGB_BLANK 2.5 HGB_BLANK
HGB_PARA 41 HGB_PARA
V24 12 48.1
V24
14 49.4
V11 25.8 56.2 V11
26.25 57.1
RBC V19 54 56 V19
V20 26.2
54 56 V20
48
RBC_COUNT 32.1 RBC_COUNT
46.1
V09 57.2 59.5 V09
V26 55.8 V26
58.2
PUMP_PRES PUMP_PRES
S 57.2 59.3 S
BUILD_PRES BUILD_PRES
Public SPUMP_VA
0
25.3
44.5 45.5 54.5 57 S
40.5 55.5
PUMP_VA
C 0 1.5 4.5 6 25.2 27.5 33.5 35 48.6 49.6 C
46.7 58.5
BUILD_VAC 16.5 22.1 49.6 BUILD_VAC
22 25 55.3
PUMP_WAST 1.2 9.4 25.4 41.7 PUMP_WAST
E 19.7 22.4
7.35 17.4 27.5 51 E
CONST 19 CONST
49
SELECT_WBC 18 SELECT_WBC
SELECT_RB SELECT_RB
Zap C 18 C
ZAP_WBC 50 ZAP_WBC
53
ZAP_RBC 51.2 ZAP_RBC
54
6-21
Fluidic System
6.7.2 Pre-piercing sequence:

See the following figure for the fluidic actions:
0~1.2sThe sample collection assembly moves from WBC bath to the sample aspiration position.
1.3~1.6sThe sample probe moves to position of the isolating bubbles.
1.7~1.9sOpen V1 and V2, and the DIL syringe aspirates 50uL of isolating bubbles from the sample probe.
1.2~7.35sStart waste pump LP2 to drain probe wipe waste pipe
3.5~4sThe SH syringe aspirates 300uL of diluent.
6-22
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T25 C14 C46 C50 LEO（ I（ LYSE
T7 T3
LEO(I)
DIFF bath J3-T12 - C1 C47 C51 LEO（ II（ LYSE
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
J25-T26- C77 Flow LH
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
RV SV15 SV0 SV0 Transduc detection
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
Isolating LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
cover SV12 cover SV11
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
Isolating T97 Isolating T109 T111
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
containe T129 T121 T116
r LP3
6-23
Fluidic System
1.9~2.8sThe sample probe moves to the pre-piercing position.

2.9~4.4sThe sample probe returns to start position (inside probe wipe), and the DIL syringe cleans the outside of sample probe through the probe wipe.
4.4~5.2sThe SH syringe cleans the inside of sample probe, and the DIL syringe cleans the outside of sample probe through the probe wipe.
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 J42-T165- C3
C29 C28
J43 0
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-24
Fluidic System
5.5~5.9sThe pierce probe moves to position of the isolating bubbles.

5.7~8.8sThe DIL syringe aspirates 7650uL of diluent from the diluent container.
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T34 T35
T37 SV1 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
T47
chamber 1
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-25
Fluidic System
5.9~6.1sThe ASP syringe generates 2uL of isolating bubbles in the sample probe
6.2~7.5sThe pierce probe moves to the aspirate position.
7.6~10sThe ASP syringe aspirates 20uL of blood sample from the sample probe.
9.4sStart waste pump LP2
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-26
Fluidic System
6.7.3 Primary analysis sequence

0~2.2sThe sample probe returns to inside of the probe wipe
2.3~3.5sThe sample aspirating assembly moves to upper position of the WBC bath
0.04~2.8sThe DIL bath cleans outside of the sample probe, and the waste pump is pumping waste during the process
0~2.7sThe lyse syringe aspirates 2000uL of lyse (including LEO(I), LEO(II) and LH lyse)
2.5~3.5sMeasure HGB reference voltage
0~1.5sStart vacuum pump LP3 to drain the DIFF bath
0~17.4sStart waste pump LP2 to drain probe wipe waste pipe, RBC bath and WBC bath
0~25.3s Generate and maintain pressure in the pressure chamber
6-27
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
LYSE(2.5mLX3)
Isolating
T77
SH(10mL)
T47
chamber 1 C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-28
Fluidic System
9.2~10.2sThe sample probe returns to inside of the probe wipe

9.5~10.8sClean the outside of the sample probe with probe wipe and the DIL bath
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T34 T35 T37 SV1 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-29
Fluidic System
10.8~11.3The sample aspirating assembly moves to upper position of the WBC bath
11.4~7.6sThe sample probe goes down to the WBC bath
12.5~14.2sThe sample probe wiggles
12.5~13.5sDispense 6uL of blood sample into the WBC bath with the ASP syringe
13.5~16.1sTurn on and off V12 continuously to generate bubbles to mix the sample in WBC bath
11.6~13.1sDispense 2500uL of diluent into the WBC bath with the DIL syringe
12~13sDispense 135uL of LEO(II) lyse into the DIFF bath with the lyse syringe
6-30
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
C15
J19-T24-J20 J1-T11-J2 C45 C49 DILUENT
T4
T25 C14 C46 C50 LEO（I） LYSE
T7 T3
LEO(I)
LEO（II） LYSE
J39-T14 -J11
DIFF bath C1 C47 C51
J40-T15-J12
J3-T12 -J4 T6 T2
SV17
J17-T22-J18
(T21)
LEO(II)
C12 C13 T5 T1
C77 Flow
T164
J25-T26-J26 LH
T131
T30 T31 T28 T29
cell
T27
T49
Reagent

RV SV15 detection
SV04 SV05 SV06 Transducer
GF1
T136
T70
PV28
T10
T8
J21-T40-J22
T9
J7-T39-J8 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 T43 J16-T17-J41 T133 T71 T72 PC
T33
J5-T18 -J6
T32
T38 C25 T135 C41 C16
J23-T42-J24
SV14 GP
J9-T13-J10
SV16 T74
J15
T35 T36 C27 GF2
T37
J42-T165-J43
T34 C3
C29 C28 SV10
T75-T76
C4
T19 J13-T20-J14
T41
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5 SV09
J31-T137-J32
J33-T138-J34
J35-T139-J36
C78
T156
C64 T166
T149
T78
C42 Transducer C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
T82
T81
C65
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T57
T63
T66
DH
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T163
T53
T67
T55
(T148)
J37-T52-J38
T51
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC SV21
T85
C20 T104 C33
T92
C32 T102
T160
T90 T94 T106 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
DIL(10mL)
T103 C54
T91 C58
T127
C56 C57 C60
LEO(II) reagent
T93 T105
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
T87
container
container
T143
container
T141
T142
J29-T101-J30
J27-T89-J28
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding C31 T86

LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
LP2
Waste C43 C11
T129 T121 T116
container
LP3
6-31
Fluidic System

14.6~15.7sClean outside of the sample probe with probe wipe and the DIL syringe
16.1~16.9sClean outside of the sample probe with probe wipe and the DIL bath
15.1~16.2sClean inside of the sample probe with the SH syringe
15~9sAspirate 600uL of lyse with the LYSE syringe
6-32
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T33 T43 T133 T71
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-33
Fluidic System
17.2~18.3sThe sample probe goes down to the WBC bath

18.3~20.2sAspirate 52.08uL of diluted sample with the ASP syringe
17.5~19sDispense 1648uL of diluent into the RBC bath with the DIL syringe
17.2~19.7Aspirate 1200uL of sample from the DIFF bath with the SH syringe, sample preparation process
19sSwitch to the constant current source
16.5~22sGenerate vacuum in the vacuum chamber for the first time
6-34
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T33 T43 T133 T71
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath sheilding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
Isolating T97 Bath shielding T109 T111
T124
wipe
T98 cover 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-35
Fluidic System

20.2~21.9sClean outside of the sample probe with probe wipe and the DIL syringe
20.7~21.8sDispense 500uL of LH lyse into the WBC bath with the LYSE syringe
20.5~23.6sTurn on and off V12 continuously to generate bubbles to mix the sample in WBC bath
19.75~43.7sThe SH syringe generates sheath fluid in the flow cell
20.5~21.5sThe SP syringe pushes the sample in reservoir into the flow cell rapidly
21.8~41sThe SP syringe pushes the sample in reservoir into the flow cell to flow stable sample flow
6-36
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T33 T43 T133 T71
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-37
Fluidic System
21.4~22.1sSample aspirating assembly moves to the RBC bath

22.2~23.2sThe sample probe goes down to the RBC bath
22.93~25.1sASP syringe is initialized, and the 52.08uL of diluted sample in the sample probe is added to the RBC bath
22.95~25.2sDispense 800uL of diluent into the RBC bath with the DIL syringe
24~40sPerform DIFF analysis in the flow cell
25.8~26.3sTurn on and off V11 continuously to generate bubbles to mix the sample in RBC bath
22.1~25sGenerate vacuum in the vacuum chamber for the second time
6-38
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T33 T43 T133 T71
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-39
Fluidic System

25.9~27sClean outside of the sample probe with the DIL syringe
25.4~27.5sStart waste pump LP2 to drain probe wipe waste pipe
22.5~27.5sStart vacuum pump LP3 to drain the DIFF bath
26.9~28sThe sample aspirating assembly moves to upper position of the WBC bath
26.2~42.1sOpen V21 to deliver fluid in the WBC front bath to the back bath through the aperture
28.9~40.9sWBC analysis
26.2~48sOpen V20 to deliver fluid in the RBC front bath to the back bath through the aperture
32.1~46.1sRBC analysis
33.5~35.2sStart waste pump LP3 to drain the DIFF bath
6-40
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T33 T43 T133 T71
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-41
Fluidic System
38~43sAspirate 8550uL of diluent with the DIL syringe

42.2~43.8Turn on waste pump LP2 to drain WBC bath
41~42sMeasure HGB reference voltage
6-42
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T33 T43 T133 T71
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-43
Fluidic System
44.9~45.4sTurn on and off V12 continuously to generate bubbles in WBC bath
43.7~45.3sClean sample preparing tubes and DIFF bath with the SH syringe
6-44
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-45
Fluidic System
45.3~46.7sAspirate 1900uL of diluent with the SH syringe

46.2~47.6sAspirate 2300uL of diluent with the DIL syringe
47.1~48.1sThe ASP syringe generates 2uL of separating bubbles in the sample probe
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-46
Fluidic System
46.8~48.7sClean sample preparing tubes and DIFF bath with the SH syringe
48.1~49.4Turn on waste pump LP2 to drain RBC bath
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
Bath shielding LYSE(2.5mLX3)
T77
SH(10mL)
cover
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shieding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-47
Fluidic System
49~50.6sAspirate 1500uL of diluent with the SH syringe

49.6~51.1sInitialize the DIL syringe and dispense 800uL of diluent into the RBC bath
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T34 T35
T37 SV1 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-48
Fluidic System
50.7~52.8sThe SH syringe dispenses 1500uL of diluent into the DIFF bath through sample preparing tubes
51.1~523.1sSP syringe initialization
50.7~52.7sLYSE syringe initialization
53.65~56.5sClean back bath of the WBC bath
54~56sClean back bath of the RBC bath
56.2~57.1sTurn on and off V11 continuously to generate bubbles in RBC bath
6-49
Fluidic System
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-50
Fluidic System
55.8~58.2sOpen V26 and waste pump LP3 to drain the vacuum chamber
57.2~59.5sOpen V09 to release pressure in the pressure and vacuum chamber.
57.2~59.3sStart the pressure pump to help release vacuum of the vacuum chamber
SV18
(T23)
J19-T24- J1-T11-
C15
J2
C45 C49 DILUENT
J20 T4
T7 T3
LEO(I)
T6
J39-T14 -
T2
J40-T15-
SV17 J4
LEO(II)
J17-T22-
(T21)
J11
J12
J18
C12 C13 T5 T1
T164
T30 T31 T28 T29
T131
J26 cell
T27
Reagent

T49
SV04
5 6 er
GF1
T136
T70
J21-T40- PV28
T10
T8
J7-T39-J8
T9
J22 T16 C37 T73 -T132
T44 T134
C26 J16-T17- T72 PC
T43 T133 T71
T33
T38 J41
T32
C25
J5-T18 -
T135C41 C16
SV14 SV16 GP T74
J6
J23-T42-
J9-T13-
J24
J15
J10
T36 C27 GF2
T35 SV1
T37
T34 C3
J42-T165-
C29 C28
0
J43
T75-T76
C4 J13-T20-
T19
T41
J14
T45
SP(250uL)
C30
T77
SH(10mL)
chamber 1
T47
C68
T140
T155
SV08
T68
C5
C78
SV09
J31-T137-
J33-T138-
J35-T139-
T156
C64 T166
J32
J34
J36
T149
Transducer
T78
C42 C69 C24
SV13

T80
C17
C36 T167
C79
T46 T60
T150
C18
T79
T62
T168
C65
T82
T81
T146
C67 C19
T64
T83
T48
T69
T152
T153
C44 T50 C8 C38

T63
T57
DH
T66
SV07
T61
VC
T162 ASP(100uL)
C66 T65
T151 T58
T59 SV19
T54
SV01 SV03 SV02 TS
C75 C76 SV22
T154
T53
T163
T67
T55
J37-T52-
(T148)
T51
J38
T84
T108
T56
T96
C9
RBC C22 SV20 C73
WBC C20 SV21
T85
T92 T104 C33
C32 T102
T90 T106
T160
T94 C74
(T147)
T161
T95 T107
SV27 SV26 C53 C55 C59
C54
DIL(10mL)
T91 T103
C56 C57 C58
T127
T93 T105 C60
LEO(I) reagent
C21 C23
LH reagent
T144
container
container
T87
container
reagent
T143
LEO(II)
T141
T142
J29-T101-
J27-T89-
(T100)
Bath shielding
(T88)
SPB Bath shielding

J28
J30
C31 T86
LF1
C6
Probe T126 T125 C34
T124
wipe
T98 chamber 3 T110
chamber 2 T112
T113
T99
C7
T114 C35
T123
C62 C61
C70
C72 C71
T157
T145
T159
SV23
T158
SV25
SV24
T130
T117
T122
C63
C10
T128 T120 T119 T118 T115
C39 C40
Waste LP2
C43 C11
r LP3
6-51
Fluidic System
6.7.3.1Analysis sequence of closed tube predilute CBC+DIFF mode

The analysis sequences of closed tube predilute CD mode are almost the same as those of
the whole blood mode, the only difference is:
1. No pre-piercing, the pre-piercing sequence only contains one action - the probe goes
down.
2. Samples of the predilute mode are diluted before presented to the analyzer, the sample
aspiration volume is 80uL, and 40uL of sample is dispensed to the WBC and RBC bath
respectively.
3. No wiggling of sample probe for its cleaning
6.7.3.2Analysis sequence of autoloading whole blood CBC+DIFF mode

The analysis sequences of autoloading whole blood mode are almost the same as those of the
closed tube whole blood mode, the only difference is:
1. Sample aspiration position of autoloading mode is in the autoloading track, while that of
the closed tube mode is inside the sample compartment.
2. The autoloading pre-piercing sequence can be overlapped with the last 10s of the primary
analysis sequence.
6.7.3.3Analysis sequence of open vial whole blood CBC+DIFF mode

The analysis sequences of open vial whole blood mode are almost the same as those of the
closed tube whole blood mode, the only difference is:
No pre-piercing sequence, the sample probe start position is the aspiration position outside the
analyzer.
No wiggling of sample probe for its cleaning
6.7.3.4Analysis sequence of open vial predilute CBC+DIFF mode

The analysis sequences of open vial predilute CD mode are almost the same as those of the
whole blood mode, the only difference is:
Samples of the predilute mode are diluted before presented to the analyzer, the sample
aspiration volume is 80uL, and 40uL of sample is dispensed to the WBC and RBC bath
respectively.
6.7.3.5Analysis sequences of the CBC mode

The analysis sequences of CBC mode does not involve fluidic actions of the DIFF & optical
channel, their differences from the analysis sequence of CD mode are:
1. Sample aspiration volume. The sample aspiration volume of whole blood CD and CBC
mode is 20uL and 15uL respectively; and the sample aspiration volume of predilute CD
and CBC mode is 80uL and 40uL respectively.
2. No actions related to the DIFF bath, including dispensing of blood, LEO(I) and LEO(II)
lyse, DIFF bath bubbling and cleaning.
3. No actions related to the flow cell, including sample preparation, sheath fluid, sample flow,
sample preparing tube cleaning, etc.
6-52
Fluidic System
6.8 Function of Fluidic Valves

Name Function
Works with SV01 and SV03 to control the liquid dispensing
SV01
direction of DIL syringe
SV02 Controls the liquid aspiration and dispensing of DIL syringe
SV03
Works with LYSE syringe to control the aspiration and
SV04
dispensing of LH lyse
SV05
dispensing of LEO(II) lyse
SV06
dispensing of LEO(I) lyse
SV07
SV08 Works with the vacuum chamber to flush and drain the flow cell
SV09 Connecting vacuum and pressure chamber
SV10 Controls bubble generation of DIFF bath
SV11 Controls bubble generation of RBC bath
SV12 Controls bubble generation of WBC bath

Works with the SH syringe to aspirate or dispense probe
SV13
cleanser, or clean inside and outside of the sample probe
SV14 Controls the aspiration and dispensing of SH syringe
Works with the SH syringe to prepare sample or clean sample
SV15
preparing tubes
SV16 Works with sheath fluid to drive sample
SV17 Controls the flow and break of sheath fluid
SV18 Waste valve by outlet of the flow cell

Controls the diluent direction for RBC back bath cleaning,
SV19
connects the back bath and diluent container
RBC back bath control valve, connects the back bath and
SV20
vacuum chamber
WBC back bath control valve, connects the back bath and
SV21
vacuum chamber
Controls the diluent direction for WBC back bath cleaning,
SV22
connects the back bath and diluent container
SV23 WBC waste valve
SV24 RBC waste valve
SV25 Probe wipe waste valve

Vacuum chamber waste valve, drains the vacuum chamber and
SV26
controls vacuum generation
SV27 DIFF waste valve
Sample preparing pinch valve, controls sample preparation and
PV28
the cleaning action after sample preparation
6-53
7Optical System
7.1 Overview of Optical System Principle
The optical system principle is based on that of the flow cytometer: when the stained cells pass
the facula detection area under the influence of "Hydrodynamic focusing", light scatter is
produced after exposure of the a cell under light beam, where the forward scatter reflects the
volume of the cell, and the side scatter reflects the complexity of the nucleus. Therefore,
BC-5380 or BC-5180 is able to differentiate different cells by collecting and analyzing the
forward scatter and side scatter, and presents the result using 2D scattergram. The optical
system is composed of the laser radiation module and scatter sensors.
7.2 Optical Path and Workflow of the Optical System

The optical path of optical system is shown in Figure 7-1.
13
12
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Figure 7-1 Optical path of optical system
1.Semiconductor laser (670nm) 2.Laser collimating lens

3.Cylindrical lens A 4.Cylindrical lens B
5.Flow cell 6.Posterior collimating lens
7.Light splitter 8.Forward scatter diaphragm
9.Forward scatter focusing lens 10.Forward scatter PD
11.Side scatter diaphragm 12.Side scatter focusing lens
13.Side scatter PD 14./
The optical system uses semiconductor laser (1) as the source of light, which emits a red laser
beam of 670nm. The laser beam passes through the collimating lens and gets collimated, and
then adjusted by cylindrical lens A (3) and B (4) which are placed orthogonally, to form a flat
elliptic laser beam of 15um*300um (@13.5%) going through the sample flow (6) in the center
of the flow cell (5).
7-1
Optical System
Figure 7-2 Laser facula through the flow cell

After the sample probe releases the white blood cells treated with reagent, the sheath flow
wraps the cells and makes them passing through the flow cell one by one, as shown in Figure
7-2. The flat elliptic laser beam irradiate light on each white blood cell passing through the flow
cell (the red line shown in Figure 7-1).
After the light scatter comes out of the flow cell (5), it is collimated by posterior collimating lens
(6) into parallel light, and then split by the light splitter (7) into 2 scatter beams which are the
same in dimension. The forward scatter split by the light splitter passes through a forward
scatter diaphragm (8) and becomes the 2-5 degree scatter, and is then focused on the forward
scatter PD by the forward scatter focusing lens (9); the side scatter split by the light splitter
pass through a side scatter diaphragm (11) and becomes the 8-20 degree scatter, and is then
focused on the side scatter PD by the side scatter focusing lens.
The forward scatter and side scatter are transferred to electric signals by the PD, which are
then processed by the signal processing system based on which the 2D scattergrams are
generated, and thus the 5-part differentiation of white blood cells are achieved.
7-2
Optical System
7.3 Components of the Optical System

The figure below shows the components of optical system, and the name of the components
are listed in Table 7-1.
Figure 7-3 Components of optical system

Table 7-1 Components of optical system
Front optical assembly Side scatter diaphragm assembly

Flow cell measurement assembly Side scatter PD assembly
Rear optical assembly Laser control board
Light splitter lens assembly Rear cover assembly
Forward scatter diaphragm Base plate assembly
assembly
Forward scatter PD assembly /
7.4 Optical System Status Determination

The optical system status is determined using 7um standard particle. The operation
procedures and determination criteria are as follows:
Get a vial of 7μm standard particles, mix it by shaking the vial gently, and then dispense 3-4
drops into a 1.5ml centrifugal tube. Dilute the solution in the centrifugal tube to 1ml, cap the
tube and mix it well to prepare the standard particle solution for status determination, as shown
in Figure 7-4;
Figure 7-4 Preparing the 7um standard particle solution
7-3
Optical System
Select the venous whole blood mode (open-vial) for sample analysis, and run the 7um
standard particle. After the analysis is completed, select the analysis data in the "Review"
screen, and then click the "Optical" button on top right to go to the optical adjustment screen,
as shown in Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 Optical adjustment screen of standard particle

Select "Standard Particle Mode", and then click "Calculate". Check if the "FS Gravity Center
Position" falls in the range of 17.6±0.5, and "SS Gravity Center Position" 105.3±1.0. If not,
enter the FS peak target (17.6) and SS peak target (105.3) in the "Peak Target" fields, and
then the instrument will automatically calculate the gain. Click the "Gain Setup" button to apply
the gain;
At the "Run" screen, run the 7un particle solution again, and then check if the "FS Gravity
Center Position" is 17.6±0.5, and the "SS Gravity Center Position" is 105.3±1.0. Repeat Step
2-4 until these 2 values falls in the respective range
If the "FS Gravity Center Position" and "SS Gravity Center Position" of particle 1 meet the
requirements, check if the following requirements are met:
FS 0.1max Width (SD) ≤6.8
SS 0.1max Width (SD) ≤15
Check if the FS and SS gains displayed on the "Gain" setup" (Setup>General Setup>Gain)
meet the following requirements:
FS Gain ≤150
SS Gain ≤220
If the requirements are met, the optical system status determination is finished, and the result
is Pass. If the requirements are not met, see the next section below.
7-4
Optical System
7.5 Maintenance and Replacement of the Optical

System
When the optical system test using standard particle fails or when error occurs, service is
needed. Service of optical system includes maintenance and replacement, where
maintenance refers to the cleaning, wiping procedures when there is no component damage,
and replacement generally refers to the replacement of the whole optical system when there is
component damage or maintenance failure (considering the shortage of service tools and the
complexity of the service procedures).
7.5.1 Maintaining the Optical System

The maintenance of optical system is usually used when there are errors like flow cell clog.
See the details below.
Flow cell exterior wall needs cleaning
 Error presentation: the gravity center in the scattergram descends, FS and SS values in
the gain setup screen slightly high, and the dots in the scattergram are more sporadic (but
still in a normal distribution).
 Error confirmation: open the top cover and right door using a cross-headed screwdriver,
loosen the 6 screws fixing the optical system shielding cover to remove the cover. Check
along the laser beam to see if there is brightened dot on the exterior wall of the flow cell.
Spot of light on the

exterior wall of the
flow cell
Figure 7-6 Brightened dot on the exterior wall of the flow cell
 Troubleshooting: if evident brightened dot is found, wipe the place with dust-free cloth
dipped with anhydrous alcohol until the dot disappears.
 Note:
1. Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam in the maintenance process;
2. Do not touch the radiation-proof diaphragm or damage the flow cell assembly while
wiping;
3. Check if there is any evident brightened dot on the exterior wall of the flow cell after
wiping.
Flow cell interior wall needs cleaning

 Error presentation: abnormal DIFF scattergram. The figures below show examples of
abnormal scattergrams of normal blood sample and standard particle.
7-5
Optical System
Figure 7-7 Scattergram of normal blood sample when the flow cell interior wall needs
cleaning
Figure 7-8 Scattergram of standard particle when the flow cell interior wall needs
cleaning
 Error confirmation: open the top cover and right door using a cross-headed screwdriver,
loosen the 6 screws fixing the optical system shielding cover to remove the cover. Check
if there is brightened dot on the interior wall of the flow cell. At the meantime, place a white
paper before the side scatter PD assembly, and check if there is a ring in the focal facula,
shown as follows:
Flow cell interior

wall needs
cleaning (exterior
wall also needs
cleaning in this
example)
Figure 7-9 Brightened dot on the interior wall of the flow cell
7-6
Optical System
The focal facula

before the side
scatter PD
assembly with an
optical ring
Figure 7-10 The optical ring before the side scatter PD assembly
 Troubleshooting: click Menu>Service>Maintenance, and then select "Probe Cleanser
Soak" to perform automatic soaking and maintenance to the flow cell. If the optical ring in
the focal facula before the side scatter PD assembly still exists, manual probe cleanser is
needed to be performed as instructed below:
1. Take out 2 clean S-50 tubes or 3350 silicone tubes (length: about 10cm). Connect
one tube to the newly unpacked syringe, and the other one to the waste outlet
connector of the flow cell. Snip the plastic cable tie using a pair of diagonal pliers, and
then remove the flow cell tray using a screwdriver. Unplug the sheath fluid inlet tube,
and plug the tube which is connected to the syringe;
2. Draw the diluent from the flow cell assembly with the syringe, and then put the other
end of the tube connecting to the waste outlet into a small beaker. Inject a certain
volume of probe cleanser with the syringe, and make sure it is visible that the probe
cleanser is flowing into the flow cell.
Figure 7-11 Manual probe cleanser maintenance

3. After the flow cell is fully filled with probe cleanser, wait 10-15 minutes. Slightly draw
the fluid with the syringe, and check if the brightened dot on the interior wall
disappears;
4. If the dot disappears, draw out the probe cleanser out of the flow cell assembly, and
then reset the tubing. In the PC software, click Menu> Service> Maintenance>
Clean>Flow cell to perform the flow cell cleaning until the "DIFF Particles Total" of the
background count "Special Info." becomes less than 50 (place the cursor on the
background count result of the "Review" screen, and then right-click the mouse to
show the "Special Info.");
5. If the brightened dot still exist after manual cleaning, the optical system needs to be
replaced. See the next section for details.
7-7
Optical System
 Note:
1. Generally speaking, if the scattergram distribution is similar to Figure 7 or it is judged
that the flow cell interior wall needs cleaning, perform automatic maintenance of the
flow cell first, and do not remove the cover for check until the automatic maintenance
fails or does not take effect;
2. Avoid direct eye contact with the laser beam; wear proper personal protective
equipment during manual cleaning, and wear the PVC gloves properly; do not drop
the probe cleanser on the instrument or on the clothes/skin of any people.
Flow cell clog

 Error presentation: when flow cell clog occurs, the valve pressure ascends, and the "Flow
cell clog" error is reported by the instrument.
 Error confirmation: the error report of the instrument;
 Troubleshooting: click the "Remove Error" button to see if the error can be removed. If yes,
check if the fluid in the flow cell can flow out from the waste outlet smoothly while pulling
and pushing the syringe (as instructed by the manual maintenance procedure); If not,
replace the optical system as instructed by the next section.
7.5.2 Replacing the Optical System

If there is component damage or maintenance failure, optical system replacement is needed.
Do as follows:
1) Perform the shutdown procedure, and then power off the analyzer;
2) Remove the top cover and right door of the analyzer;
Figure 7-12 Removal of the top cover and the right door
3) Snip the plastic cable tie fixing the flow cell tray with a pair of diagonal pliers, and then
unscrew the 2 M3x8 cross-recessed panhead screws (with washers) fixing the flow cell
tray with a cross-headed screwdriver to remove the tray;
4) Wear a pair of disposal PVC gloves, and then remove the T connector of the commutation
assembly and the tubing of SV18 valve in turn (marked by the arrows in the figure below).
If there is any fluid leakage, wipe it with tissue or wet cloth immediately to avoid corrosion
7-8
Optical System
to the instrument;
Figure 7-13 Removing the flow cell tray and tubing of the T connector
5) Get a clean S-50 tube or 3350 silicone tube of about 10cm, and connect one end to the
sheath fluid inlet, and the other end to the sample inlet. Connect the tube that is removed
from the SV18 valve to the sample outlet (marked by red arrows in the figure);
6) Disconnect the optical system signal transmission cable and control wire from the data
board;
7) Unscrew the 6 inner hexagon screws fixing the optical system shielding cover with a
screwdriver, and then remove the 4 M4x8 cross-recessed panhead screws (with washers)
from the base plate;
Figure 7-14 Screws on the base plate
8) Remove the whole optical system from the instrument, and install the shielding cover
back to the removed system, and put them into the packing box;
9) Install the new optical system based on the reversed procedure above.
7-9
Optical System
7.6 Optical System Gain Calibration

Optical system gain calibration is necessary when the maintenance or replacement of the
optical system finishes, the analyzer is left unused for a long time, the ambient environment is
changed, and the analyzer has experienced a long-distance transportation, in order to make
sure the optical system can work properly. The calibration should be performed as instructed
below:
Select the venous whole blood mode (open-vial) for sample analysis, and run the BC-5D
control. After the analysis is completed, select the analysis data in the "Review" screen, and
then click the "Optical" button on top right to go to the optical adjustment screen,
Select "Control Mode" and click "Calculate" as shown in Figure 15. The "FS Gravity Center
Position" of particle 2 should fall in ±1.94 of the BC-5D control target, and the "SS Gravity
Center Position" should fall in ±2.6 of the BC-5D control target. If one or both of the values are
out of range, perform the next step of gain calibration.
Figure 7-15 Optical adjustment screen of control

Enter the FS and SS gravity center targets of the BC-5D control into the "Particle 2 Peak
target" fields, and then the analyzer automatically calculate the gain values needed, which are
displayed in the "Gain" column. Click the "Gain Setup" button, and the FS and SS gain will be
updated to the new gain values.
Run the BC-5D control again, and go to the "Optical" adjustment screen. Perform Step 2 to
confirm. If the values are still out of range, repeat Step 1-3 until they fall in the respective
range.
7-10
8 Hardware System
8.1 Overview
This chapter introduces functions of the hardware system and its interfaces. The hardware
system includes data flow, user interface, control flow, power system, structure and
connections by logic.
Hardware System
Optical Product
detection application
principle interlink
Counting bath
Impedance Signal sorting
Laser tube
detection Signal collection Direct user Network cable
HGB sensor
principle Digital processing input
Photocell
Main control Key switch
Colorimetry
detection embedded
system Direct user Indicator
principle
Data stream design platform output Buzzer
Barcode
External scanner
interfaces
Motor Structure
Moving
Electromagne
mechanism and interlink User interaction design
t
drive and design
Valve detection
Pump Fluid
Float switch component
drive and
Heater detection
Fan Thermal Auxiliary
component control Power
Temperature drive and platform monitor
sensor detection
Pressure Power switch
sensor System status Grid power
monitor
Power Grid power
Barcode input
Fluid conversion
scanner
detection
Photocouplers Control stream design Power system design
Figure 8-1 The logical diagram of hardware system
8.2 Diagram of Hardware System

J81 Indicator
J78
Electrimagnetic J2/J3- Digital board/key board
valve P12V J13 control J8
Waste pump J4- Network patching
P12V board J1
board
D5V J11 Optical/right door
Fluid detection J7-D5V
J85/86/77 J79
board micro-switch
Temperature FS/SS
Power drive
J15 P24V
sensor and J8 preamplification
Diluent/waste board
wires
board
sensor- +- LaserHGB
control board
float&switch
Sample J9
PowerA12V Analog assembly
collection board WBC bath
assembly/relieve J10 AC120 board
valve V RBC bath
Syringe
photocoupler Pressure sensor
J11
photocouple J6 D5V/
Door
r P12V
Fan P12V/2 electromagnet
J5-12V Mix motor
4V（
photocoupler
Diff/laser J14-
D5V
Autoloading Autoloading
heater
Sample
P24V board photocoupler
2 autoloading
J16-J19 motors
collection Mix motor
assembly/syring Up/down/forwar
e motor d/backward
motors
Figure 8-2
8-1
Hardware System
8.3 Analog Board

8.3.1 Overview
The analog board drives sensors, amplifies, filters and sorts primary signals of the sensors into
signals that meets A/D input requirement. Besides, the analog board supplies power to all
analog boards. Functional diagram of the analog board is as follows:
RBC/PLT RBC/PLT signal RBC/PLT

sensor adjusting RBC/PLT HOLE
Constant current
RBC/PLT aperture constant
source and
current source module and
zapping control module zapping control
WBC WBC signal WBC

sensor adjusting WBC HOLE
Zapping
WBC aperture constant
current source and zapping control
HGB control
HGB HGB signal Gain control Connector

sensor adjusting HGB to digital
Drive Drive control
HGB luminotron control buffer board
constant current drive modul
A±12V（ e
Monitor signal
AC120V Analog power
Power adjusting
A±12V adjusting module
module
SS
preamplificati SS adjusting SS
on board channel
FS FS adjusting FS
preamplificati channel FS DC
on board background
Switch control signal
Laser
control Laser tube drive current monitor signal
board
Figure 8-3 Functional diagram of the analog board
8.3.2 Function
The analog board can be divided into 7 modules: analog power adjusting module, voltage
monitoring module, HGB channel module, impedance channel module, optical channel
module, drive buffering module, and pressure monitoring module.
Analog power adjusting module:
This module filters the A±12V voltage and transforms it into the 5V/-5V analog voltage
required by the analog section; meanwhile it doubling rectifies the A+12V voltage, and
stabilizes it into 56V direct current.
Voltage monitoring module:
This module converts level of the voltages to be monitored on the board to the level that
can be received by AD (0~5V), and makes the impedance fulfill requirement of AD
conversion.
The monitored signals include: WBC/RBC aperture voltage, +/-12V, 56V zapping power
and FS direct current background.
HGB channel module:
8-2
Hardware System
This module drives HGB sensor, amplifies and adjusts HGB signals.
Impedance channel module:
This module drives the RBC/PLT and WBC sensors, amplifies and adjusts RBC/PLT and
WBC impedance signals. Besides, it provides counting bath zapping function.
Optical channel module:
This module amplifies and adjusts FS/SS and SF signals input from the preamplification
board.
Pressure monitoring module:
This module drives the pressure sensor, coverts pressure/vacuum change into voltage
change, and amplifies the voltage.
Drive buffering module:
This module converts TTL control signals input from external boards into actuating signals
with certain driving capability.
8.3.3 Structure
The PCBA structure of the analog board is as follows.
Table 8-1 Modules of the analog board
Module No. Description

P1 Impedance channel module
P2 Pressure monitoring module
P3 Analog power adjusting module
P4 HGB channel module
P5 Voltage monitoring module
P6 Optical channel module
P7 Drive buffering module
8-3
Hardware System
P3
P6
P4
P5 P7
P2
P1
Figure 8-4 PCBA structure of the analog board (top)
8-4
Hardware System
8.3.4 Interfaces
 Interface layout and description
J2 J4 J3 J6
J5
4
J
HGB 8
drive
and Optical signal
Power adjusting amplifi amplification
module cation
J
9
Control
Monitor signal adjusting signal drive
circuit circuit
Shielding
region
Air pressure J1 Constant

Impedance
adjusting current Impedance J
preamplific
circuit source amplification 7
ation
circuit circuit
J2
Figure 8-5 Analog board sockets

Table 8-2 Analog board interfaces
Position No. Function

J1 Interface of the analog board and RBC/PLT
sensor
J2 Interface of the analog board and WBC sensor
J3 Analog signal interface of the analog board and
optical preamplification board
J4 Interface of the analog board and HGB sensor
J5 Interface of analog power
J24 Interface of zapping power
J6 Interface of the analog board and laser control
board
J7 High speed analog signal interface of the analog
board and digital control board
J8 Low speed analog signal interface of the analog
board and digital control board
J9 Digital signal interface of the analog board and
digital control board
8-5
Hardware System
8.3.5 Indicators and test points

The functions of the indicators are listed in the following table.
Table 8-3 Functions of the indicators in the analog board
Indicator Function
D47 Indicator of analog +12V, normal status: on
D48 Indicator of analog -12V, normal status: on
D49 Indicator of analog +5V, normal status: on
D50 Indicator of analog -5V, normal status: on
The functions of main test points in the board are listed in the following table.
Table 8-4 Test points in the analog board
Test
Printed label Function Note
point
TP16 2.5V Reference voltage in the Normal voltage range:
pressure monitoring circuit 2.4V~2.6V
TP22 12V Test point of 12V power Normal voltage range:
11.4V~12.6V
TP26 N12V Test point of -12V power Normal voltage range:
-11.4V~-12.6V
TP23 5V Test point of 5V power Normal voltage range:
4.75V~5.25V
TP27 N5V Test point of -5V power Normal voltage range:
-4.75V~-5.25V
TP1 56V Voltage test point of impedance Normal voltage range:
channel constant-current source 47V~60V
TP48 VCONST_MON 56V monitoring voltage Normal voltage range:
1.8V~2.2V
TP44 12VM 12V monitoring voltage Normal voltage range:
2.2V~2.6V
TP47 N12VM -12V monitoring voltage Normal voltage range:
1.2V~1.5V
TP37 HGB Output signal of HGB channel
TP2 RBC Output signal of RBC channel
TP9 WBC Output signal of WBC channel
Vacuum monitoring output
TP20 NP
signal
Pressure monitoring output
TP21 PP
signal
TP49 FS Output signal of FS channel
TP61 SS Output signal of SS channel
8.3.6 Troubleshooting
Table 5 lists the frequent errors and solutions of the analog board to guide the troubleshooting
actions. The error here refers to hardware error only, the same error situation caused by the
fluidic, optical, reagent or software systems (for which you can refer to the related chapters for
solution) are excluded.
Before troubleshooting analog board errors, the following checks shall be performed.
1. Check if the power output is normal;
8-6
Hardware System
2. Check if the wires are firmly connected to the analog board; if the wire No. and
socket No. match; and if the wires are damaged.
3. Check if the power input of the board is normal; and check if the indicators are
normal according to Table 3.
4. Restart the analyzer to see if the error is removed.
If all the above actions are done, and the error still exists, you may go on to troubleshoot the
error as instructed in the following table.
WARNING
 Be sure to wear antistatic gloves when assembling and disassembling the
board, and always hold on the edge of board.
 When using multimeter or other equipments to test a component, make sure
not to touch other components or wires to avoid board damage caused by
short circuit.
Table 8-5 Errors and troubleshooting list of the analog board
Error
No. Cause Error Diagnosis
Consequence
The following situations can all be
diagnosed as analog error:
"+12V analog
 D47 indicator turns off
voltage
1 Circuit error  The voltage of test point TP22 (12V) is
abnormal" is
outside 11.4～12.6V
reported
 The voltage of test point TP44 (12VM)
is outside 2.2V~2.6V
"-12V analog
 D48 indicator turns off
voltage
2 Circuit error  The voltage of test point TP26 (N12V)
abnormal" is
is outside -11.4～-12.6V
reported
 The voltage of test point TP47
(N12VM) is outside 1.2V~1.5V
diagnosed as luminotron error:
 The luminotron is off, the level of
TP72(HGBLED_N) is low (about 0V)
 The luminotron is on, the HGB voltage
can be adjustable along with the gain, but
HGB luminotron
3 when the gain is adjusted to its upper limit,
error
the HGB voltage is still lower than 3.2V.
The situation suggests the aging of the
"HGB Blank luminotron (when fluidic problems are
Voltage excluded)
abnormal" is  The error is removed after replacing
reported the HGB assembly
diagnosed as analog board drive circuit
error:
 The luminotron is off, and the
HGB luminotron
4 TP31(HGB_ON_N) is of high level (3.3V)
drive circuit error
when running analysis sequence
 After replacing the HGB assembly, the
luminotron is still off
 The HGB luminotron is off even after it
8-7
Hardware System
Error
Consequence
has been replaced
HGB
photoelectric cell
HGB voltage is 0; the voltage of test point
error (usually the
TP38 (HGB1) is positive and greater than
5 anode and
0.6V. The error is removed after replacing
cathode are
HGB assembly.
incorrectly
connected)
diagnosed as circuit error:
HGB voltage is higher than 4.8V when the
gain is at its minimum
The voltage of test point TP37 (HGB) is
3.2~4.8V, but the HGB voltage displayed
6 HGB circuit error on the screen is not within the range
HGB voltage is lower than 3.2V when the
gain is at its maximum, and replacing the
HGB bath fails to solve the problem
D49 (+5V) indicator is off
The voltage of test point
TP40(VCONST_HGB) is outside 2.4～2.9V
Error of the digital
HGB gain The gain changes from 50 to 200, but the
7 potentiometer on
calibration fails HGB tested is unchanged
the board
 The voltage of 56V constant current
source is outside 47～60V, or the voltage of
TP48 (VCONST_MON) is outside
1.8V~2.2V
Constant current
 The voltage difference between pin 2
"Aperture source
and pin 3 of J1 is 12~18V when running
voltage error/monitoring
8 RBC analysis, but error is reported by the
abnormal" is circuit
analyzer. This situation suggests
reported error//power
monitoring circuit error.
source error
D49 (+5V) indicator is off
Replace the counting bath with 20K
resistor, if the voltage tested by the two
ends of the resistor is outside 11.4～13.2V,
that means error occurs to the constant
current source.
"Forward diagnosed as circuit error:
scatter blank The scattergram is normal while "Forward
9 voltage Circuit error scatter blank voltage abnormal" is reported
abnormal" is D49 (+5V) indicator is off
reported The voltage of test point TP49(FS) is not
1.5～1.9V when analysis is not running
Confirm as per the following procedure:
1) Disconnect all wires connected to the
analog board and start up the analyzer, if
the error is removed, then short circuit of
Auto power-off Short circuit of
10 analog board power source can be
at startup power source
excluded; check other wires and
components connected to the analog
board.
2) Disconnect all wires connected to the
8-8
Hardware System
Error
Consequence
analog board and start up the analyzer, if
the error persists, then short circuit of
analog board power source can be
concluded, and the analog board should be
replaced.
8.4 Digital Control Board (including CPU module)

8.4.1 Overview
The digital control board is consisted of the bottom plate and CPU module connected to each
other via socket, its structure is as follows:
Pinch plate
socket 2
60pin+60 AM1808 main Pinch
pin control module plate
socket 3
Signal
80pin
connecting
Analog board Pinaster main control board
line
Figure 8-6 Digital control board sockets
8.4.2 Function
Basic functions of the digital control circuit are:
1. Data processing: receiving data collected by the analog circuit, providing operation
system and software running platform for data processing,
2. System control: providing operation system and software running platform for
scheduling and monitoring of the analyzer operations.
3. User interacting: providing hardware platform for user interaction.
8-9
Hardware System
8.4.3 Structure
Optical system
Volumetric board Power

J78 J79 J81 J8 socket
socket(J
Reserved analog Fpga
Temperature
signal control configured control board 11) US US
J86 Pinaster main socket Recorder socket
socket socket B-J B-J
control board Reserved FPGA Volumetric board Key board
CAN port socket socket
Valve control socket Analog board socket
USB-J
×2
J77
AM1808 CPU
60p module USB-J
socket
FPGA ×2
80p
Analog U2 socket
board Analog
ADC 7cm
circuit RJ45-J(J1)
RJ45 DDR2 60p
-J socket
RS232
RJ45 DB9 serial
J85 DC/DC circuit
-J port
J65
EEPROM
6cm circuit RTC
circuit
fpga-LCD display LCD back Touch
cpu-LCD display socket screen
socket light socket port
Figure 8-7 Layout of the digital control board
8.4.4 Interfaces
Table 8-6 Hardware interfaces of the Pinaster main control board
No. Position No. Function

1. J11 5V power input
2. J82 FPGA JTAG debug interface
3. J1 100M Ethernet interface
4. J78 Indicator and key board socket
5. J79 Door detection and aspirate key socket
6. J80 Volumetric board socket
7. J81 Drive board socket
8. J8 Autoloading board socket
9. J85 High speed analog signal socket
10. J86 Low speed analog signal socket
11. J77 Analog control signal socket

 Indicator
Board Position No. Function Description
CPU D1 Power indicator If the indicator is on, the power
module source is OK
Bottom D44 Power indicator If the indicator is on, the power
plate source is OK
Bottom D2 FPGA indicator If D2 flickers, FPGA is working
plate normally
Bottom D6 Network connection If the indicator is green, the
plate status indicator connection is OKOK; if it flickers,
8-10
Hardware System

there are data in transmission
Bottom D7 Network speed Yellow, on when the speed is
plate indicator 100Mbps, off when the speed is
10Mbps.
 Test point
CPU module TP1 Test point of 1.8V power Normal voltage range: 1.8V~±5%
Bottom plate TP1 Test point of 1.8V power Normal voltage range: 1.8V~±5%
Bottom plate TP36 Test point of 5V power Normal voltage range: 5V~±5%
Bottom plate TP39-43 GND Normal voltage range: 0V~±5%
Table 8-7 Errors and troubleshooting list of the digital control board
Error
Consequence
1) Disconnect all wires connected to the digital control
board and start up the analyzer, if the error is removed,
then short circuit of digital control board power source
Short
can be excluded; check other wires and components
Auto power-off circuit of
1 connected to the digital control board.
at startup power
2) Disconnect all wires connected to the digital control
source
board and start up the analyzer, if the error persists,
then short circuit of digital control board power source
can be concluded, and the digital control board should
be replaced.
The network Confirm as per the following procedure:
cannot be 1.Replace the PC to see if the error is removed
Hardware
2 connected 2.Observe indicator D6 to see if it is off
error
with upper 3.Check if the network cable is properly connected
device 4.Replace the board to see if the error is removed
1. Observe the FPGA indicator D2, if it does not flicker,
Fail to collect FPGA
3 then the FPGA is not working normally.
analog data error
2. Check the connection wire to the analog board.
3. Check if the analog board is OK.
8.5 Drive Board

8.5.1 Overview
The drive board is an auxiliary control board, its control commands come from upper
modules, such as digital control board. The drive board analyzes control commands from
upper modules and transmits them into bottom layer control signals to realize drive control
of the moving parts (sample collection assembly, syringe assembly), heat engineering
parts (heater) and fluidic parts (valves, pumps); it gathers temperature and position
information of the analyzer or its components via the sensors, and sends some or all of
8-11
Hardware System
the information to the upper modules as necessary. Its functional diagram is as follows:
Upper
control
system
Command and
data transmission
Thermal
Moving parts
parts drive
drive and Step motor
and
detection
detection
Heater
Valve
Pump
Control Sensor
platform (pressure, temperature,
etc)
Photocoupler
Float
Switch
System
Fluid parts
status Others
drive
monitor
Drive board Peripherals

Figure 8-8 Functional diagram of power drive board
8.5.2 Function
The functions of power drive board are:
1. Main control module: this module is consisted of the ARM+FPGA structure, it analyzers
upper layer commands, drives the execution parts, collects and sends reference data of the
sensors to the digital control board, so that it may control the power of the analyzer effectively.
2. Driving motor: it drives the sample collection mechanism and the syringe assembly via the
drive motor.
3. Moving mechanism detection (photocoupler detection): detects mechanism position via
sensors.
4. Driving valves and pumps: it drives valves and pumps so that samples or reagents may flow
in the fluidic system.
5. Driving heater: it forms a closed-loop control system with the temperature sensor to provide
proper temperature for operation of the components or reaction of the reagents.
6. Driving the fan: it drives the fan to eliminate heat.
7. Temperature detection: it detects the temperature of components, reagents and the
environment via temperature sensors.
8. Pressure detection: it detects output pressure of the pressure sensor to control pressure
generation of the gas system and monitor the pressure.
9. Fluid detection: it detects the electrical level signal of the fluid detection board to monitor if
there is any reagent.
10. Float switch detection: it detects the on/off status of the float switch to monitor the
full/empty status of waste container and diluent container.
11. Voltage detection: monitors the voltage of the board itself.
12. Parameter storage: it stores all types of calibration parameters so that necessary
information can be saved when power-fail occurs.
8-12
Hardware System
13. Power module :it realizes the conversion from 12V to 5V or 3.3V.
8.5.3 Structure
See Table 8-8 and Figure 8-9 for the modules of power drive board.
Table 8-8 Modules of power drive board
No. Module
P1 Motor drive module
P2 Heater drive module
P3 Moving mechanism detection (photocoupler detection) module
P4 Float switch detection module
P5 Temperature detection module
P6 Power module: (A: 5V and 12V; B: 3.3V)
P7 Fluid detection module
P8 Fan drive module
P9 Valve drive module
P10 Voltage detection module: (A: 12V detection; B: 24V detection)
P11 Pump drive module
P12 Parameter storage module
P13 Main control module
Figure 8-9 Modules of power drive board
8-13
Hardware System
8.5.4 Interfaces
Table 8-9 Interfaces of power drive board
Position
Interface
No.
J2
Valve drive interface
J3
J4 Pump drive interface

D5V and P12V power
J6
input interface
Fluid detection board
J7
interface
J8 Analog signal interface
J9 On/off detection interface
J10 Photocoupler detection

J11 interface
J13 Interface to data board
J14 Heating drive interface

P24V power input
J15
interface
J16
J17
Motor drive interface
J18
J19

See Table 8-10 and 8-11 for indicators and test points of the power drive board.
Table 8-10 Indicators of power drive board
Function Module LED_1 LED_2 Function

Sample collection
assembly X direction D51 D61 LED_1: flickers
motor when there is motor
Sample collection pulse output; off
assembly Y direction D52 D62 when no pulse
motor output.
LED_2: on when the
Motor indicator ASP motor D53 D63 residual step of
motors is not zero,
SP motor D54 D64 which means the
motors are still
SH motor D55 D65 working; off when
the actions are
DIL motor D56 D66 done.
8-14
Hardware System
Function Module LED_1 LED_2 Function
LYSE motor D57 D67
P24V_LED D98 /
P12V_LED D97 / The LED is on when

Power the power channel
indicator works normally, and
VCC_LED(5V) D96 / vice versa.
VDD_LED(3.3V) D99 /
HT1 D81 /
When the heating
Heating drive drive is working, the
HT2 D82 /
indicator LED is on; and vice
versa.
HT3 D83 /
When FPGA is
running normally,
FPGA indicator FPGA_LED D94 / the indicator
flickers; and vice
versa.
/ D87 / D88: when

photocoupler status
changes, the
indicator flickers
and then turns off;
D87: when
Photocoupler
photocoupler status
indicator / D88 / changes, the
indicator shows the
last photocoupler
status. Off when
being blocked; on
when not blocked.
When MCU is
running normally,
MCU indicator MCU_LED D91 / the indicator
flickers; and vice
versa.
When the fluid
detection board and
Fluid detection MCU board are not
LIQ D95 /
board indicator properly connected,
the indicator turns
on; and vice versa.
8-15
Hardware System
 Test point
power drive board has a complicated circuit, so there are many test points. Here we only list
some critical test points.
Table 8-11 Critical test points of power drive board
Test
Printed label Function Note
point
TP1 VCC 5V test point Normal voltage range 4.75V-5.25V
TP2 GND Ground test point Normal voltage range: 0V-0.2V
TP3 VDD 3.3V test point Normal voltage range: 3.2V-3.4V
TP5 1V2 1.2V test point Normal voltage range: 1.1V-1.3V
TP6 2V5 2.5V test point Normal voltage range: 2.4V~2.6V
TP7 P12V 12V test point Normal voltage range: 10.8V-13.2V
TP9 P24V 24V test point Normal voltage range: 21.6V-26.4V
This chapter introduces the troubleshooting process of the drive board based on its modules
and structure. The following preparations must be done before troubleshooting.
Check if the power supply of the analyzer is OK.
Check if the peripheral parts (motors, valves, and pumps), sensors (photocouplers,
temperature sensors), wires and other accessories related to the drive board are OK.
Check if the wires are firmly connected to the ports.
Restart the analyzer to see if the error is removed.
If the cause of the error still cannot be located, continue with error troubleshooting as
instructed in the following table.
8-16
Hardware System
Table 8-12 Troubleshooting Method of the power drive board
Error
No. Cause Error Diagnosis Note
Type
Before
troubleshooting
The following situations can be errors of other
concluded as power drive board errors: power modules
12V
Circuit 1. Indicator D97 turns off; that are related
1 power
error 2. Voltage of TP7 is outside 11.4V-12.6V; to the drive
error
3. Electrical components connected to board, be sure
12V power module are burnt out. to check if the
power supply is
OK.
The
troubleshooting
method above
The following situations can be
can be used for
Error of concluded as drive board errors:
modules with
the 1. When executing motor running
indicators, like
sample command, indicators D51 and D61 turn
the main control
collection Circuit off.
2 module, heating
assembly error 2. Components of the drive circuit are
module,
X burnt out.
photocoupler
direction 3. The components are not burnt out, but
detection
motor after replacing motor and wire, the motor
module, motor
still fails to run as expected.
module and fluid
detection
module.
The
troubleshooting
method above
can be used for
The following situations can be modules without
concluded as drive board errors: indicators, like
1. Components of the drive circuit are the float switch
Pump Circuit
3 burnt out. detection
errors error
2. The components are not burnt out, but module, fan
after replacing motor and wire, the motor drive module,
still fails to run as expected. temperature
detection
module and
pump drive
module.
8.6 Autoloading Board

8.6.1 Overview
The autoloading board realizes sample feeding, mixing and barcode scanning.
8.6.2 Function
 Driving step motors
The autoloading board drives the following 5 step motors:
Mix mechanism X motor
Mix mechanism Z motor
8-17
Hardware System
Mix motor
X loading motor
Y feeding motor
The step motor drive is bipolar constant current half-step drive, the position of each step
motor is detected by the corresponding position sensor.
 Electromagnet control
The electromagnet controls the opening of the sample compartment (manual closing).
 Built-in barcode scanner control
The built-in barcode scanner reads tube barcodes and tube rack barcodes. The
autoloading board controls the built-in barcode scanner via MCU. The MCU
communicates with the built-in barcode scanner (UART) via serial port 1.
 Position sensor and micro-switch status detection
There are 13 position sensors and 1 micro-switch in the autoloading board. Status
detection of position sensors and micro-switch is done by FPGA, the MCU inquires about
the storage status of the FPGA when necessary.
 Parameter storage
Due to the production and installation deviation of the mix mechanism, initial position of
the X motor and mix motor of the mix mechanism need to be adjusted, the position
parameters after the adjustment are stored in the autoloading board.
8-18
Hardware System
8.6.3 Structure
Figure 8-10 The autoloading board
8.6.4 Interfaces
Table 8-13 List of autoloading board interfaces
Interfaces Function Pin number Description

J3 Electromagnet interface 2 /
J5 Power interface 6
J6 Mix mechanism sensor interface 20
/
J7 Feed mechanism sensor interface 1 20
J8 Feed mechanism sensor interface 2 20
J11 MCU configuration interface 10 /
8-19
Hardware System

J12 Communication interface 4 /
Sample loading mechanism motor /
J14 8
interface
Mix mechanism X and Z motors /
J15 8
control interface
J16 Mix motor interface 4 /
P1 Built-in barcode scanner interface 15 /
Table 8-14 List of autoloading board indicators
Indicator Description
D3 12V power indicator, on when the 12V power is normal
D4 5V power indicator, on when the 5V power is normal
D5 3.3V power indicator, on when the 3.3V power is normal
D25 MCU working indicator, flickers every 0.5s when MCU works as normal
D26 FPGA working indicator, flickers every 0.5s when FPGA works as normal
Table 8-15 List of autoloading board test points
No. Name Pin position Description

1 TP1 PIN3 of X1 The clock output signal of 24.4545M crystal
oscillator, FPGA working clock
2 TP2 PIN47 of U2 RD signal of MCU
3 TP3 PIN62 of U2 WR signal of MCU
4 TP4 PIN10 of U2 ALE signal of MCU
5 TP5 PIN28 of U2 FPGA reset signal
6 TP6 PIN5 of J1 FPGA configuration starting signal
7 TP7 VCC +5V DC voltage(5±0.25V)
8 TP8 12V0 +12V DC voltage(+12±1.2V)
9 TP9 24V0 +24V DC voltage(+24±1.2V)
10 TP10 VDD +3.3V DC voltage(+3.3±0.15V)
11 TP11 GND
12 TP12 GND
13 TP13 1V5 +1.5V DC voltage(1.5±0.05V)
14 TP15 TUBE Tube detection photocoupler output signal (>0.4V
when blocked, <0.2V when not blocked)
15 TP18 PIN3 of X2 The clock output signal of 24.4545M crystal
oscillator, MCU working clock
16 TP21 PIN12 of U16 Feed mechanism Y motor step impulse signal
17 TP23 PIN12 of U18 Feed mechanism X motor step impulse signal
18 TP24 PIN12 of U22 Mix mechanism Z motor step impulse signal
19 TP25 PIN12 of U23 Mix mechanism X motor step impulse signal
20 TP26 PIN12 of U24 Mix motor step impulse signal
Error possibility of the autoloading board is low, and the errors can be troubleshooted with
reference to troubleshooting methods of the power drive board. The frequent errors during
autoloading process are introduced as follows.
8-20
Hardware System
Table 8-16 Troubleshooting the autoloading assembly
No. Error Type Cause Error Diagnosis Note

1. Make sure the analyzer is
electrified, and the sample
compartment door is closed, test
the voltage between the black and
The
white lines of the photocoupler
Failure of the mechanical
terminal, the voltage shall be higher
sample structure of
than 3V; open the door manually
compartment the
and test the voltage again, the
door sensor, compartment
Sample voltage shall be lower than 0.2V. If
or the door,
1 compartment not, the photocoupler is damaged
electromagnet especially
door error and must be replaced.
cannot the spring is
2. If the photocoupler is normal,
withdraw due the major
press the aspirate key and see if
to excessive cause of
the electromagnet moves. If it does
resistance. compartment
move, but the door is not opened,
door error.
the mechanical structure of the
door of damaged, and the door
spring must be reinstalled or
replaced.
Barcode
scanner setup Make sure the barcode scanner
error; setup (code system, digits) is
improper correct; check if the barcode is
pasting properly pasted, the barcode label
Barcode
position of shall lay at least 16mm from the
2 scanning /
barcode; poor tube bottom; check if the scanner
error
barcode lens is cover by dust or other stuff;
quality; and analyze the barcode quality to
improper see if there are spots or breaks, or
position of the the contrast is too low.
scanner, etc.
Failure of left
or right Y
1. Check if the photocouplers are
photocoupler;
Left or right damaged as stated above;
the block
Y 2. If the photocouplers are normal,
3 plate of Y /
photocoupler the error is cause by its block plate,
photocoupler
error which must be adjusted or
cannot move
replaced.
with feeding
of the tubes.
When X
direction 1. Check if the tube rack presses
loading is the micro-switch; The
done, valid 2. If yes, check if the micro-switch is micro-switch
X direction signal of valid. When the micro-switch is and its
4
loading error micro-switch pressed, the voltage between its connection
cannot be two ends is 0V; when it is not line must be
detected, and pressed, the voltage shall be higher checked.
then the error than 3V.
is reported.
8-21
Hardware System
8.7 Laser Control Board

8.7.1 Overview
The laser control board controls the laser so that it can emit stable laser with proper intensity.
8.7.2 Function
The functions of the laser control board are: power adjusting, laser drive current monitoring
and laser power control.
Power adjusting: this module filters the ±12V power from the analog board, the ripple after the
adjustment is lower than 100mV.
Laser drive current monitoring: measures the working current of laser, and sends the result to
analog board for monitoring.
Laser power control: laser control board controls the laser using constant power control
method, the photoelectric detector inside the laser monitors its output power real-time, and the
monitoring result forms a closed-loop system via negative feedback to realize constant power
output. The power is controlled by adjusting the potentiometer VR1; it shall be within the range
3mW~5 mW.
Control
Laser constant power unit Laser
signal
(closed loop control unit) (HL6714G)
Laser drive Power

Monitor
current adjusting
voltage
monitoring (πfiltering)
module
A±12V Laser
control
board
Figure 8-11 Function diagram of laser control board
8.7.3 Structure
The PCBA structure of the laser control board is as follows.
Table 8-17 Modules of the laser control board

P1 Power source adjustment
P2 Laser drive current monitoring
P3 Laser constant power control
8-22
Hardware System
P3 P2
P1
Figure 8-12 The PCBA structure of the laser control board (top)
8.7.4 Interfaces
The laser control board has two external interfaces, J1 to analog board and J2 to the laser.
See the following figure.
Figure 8-13 Interfaces of laser control board
8-23
Hardware System
Table 8-18 Definition of J1
PIN Definition Description I/O Level

1 AVSS -12V analog power I -12V
2 AGND Analog ground Ｏ 0
3 LASER Laser drive current Ｏ ≤5V
monitoring voltage
4 AVCC 12V analog power I 12V
5 #CONTROL Reference voltage I/O Low level: ≤0.8V
generation control High level: 5V 的 OC 门
signal
6 VCC 5V digital power I 5V
No. Name Description I/O Level

1 LDA The anode of luminotron in O -
semiconductor laser
2 LDC The cathode of luminotron in I -
semiconductor laser
3 PDA The anode of receiver in I -
semiconductor laser

The laser control board does not have an indicator, as it may interfere the measurement of the
preamplification board. See the following table for the test points.
Table 8-20 Test point of the laser control board
No. Test point Tested signal Function

1 A+12V AVCC +12V power from the analog board
2 A-12V AVSS -12V power from the analog board
5V power from the analog board, turns on
3 D5V VCC
photocouplers on board
4 AGND Analog ground \
2.5V reference voltage generated by U1 on
5 TPVREF VREF
the board
2 times the ground voltage of the sliding end
of varistor (VR1), which control the intensity
6 TP2VREF 2VREF
of the laser. The higher the voltage is, the
higher the laser light intensity, and versa.
Pressure loss of the current signal returned
7 TPIPD PDA by the photoelectric receiver in the
semiconductor laser on R1, R21 or R1//R21.
Signal of the working current of luminotron in
the semiconductor laser; the voltage of
8 TPILD LASER TPILD reflects the working current of
luminotron, which checks if the laser is
working as expected.
8-24
Hardware System
See the following table to troubleshoot errors of the laser control board:
Table 8-21 Troubleshooting errors of the laser control board
No. Error Name Criterion Cause Troubleshooting

The connection with Reconnect or replace
the analog board is the wire.
loose, or the wire is
damaged.
The power supplied Check if the power
The voltage of
to laser control board supplied by the analog
+12V power test point A+12V
1 is incorrect board is correct.
error is outside the
range 12V±0.6V The power control Check the circuits of the
circuit is not working board.
properly, like short
circuit to the ground,
so the power is
lowered or lifted.
The voltage of
test point A-12V The cause is the
-12V power
2 is outside the same as that of the Same as above
error
range +12V error.
-12V±0.6V
The connection with Reconnect or replace
the analog board is the wire.
The voltage of loose, or the wire is
5V power test point D5V is damaged.
3
error outside the The power supplied Check if the power
range 5V±0.25V to laser control board supplied by the analog
by the analog board board is correct.
is incorrect
The voltage of The connection with Reconnect or replace
signal the analog board is the wire.
#CONTROL loose, or the wire is
Control under normal damaged.
4
signal error working Check if the signal sent
The control signal
condition is no by the analog board is
sent by the analog
higher than correct.
board is incorrect
0.8V.
Voltage of Reweld or replace U1.
If the -12V power is
TPVREF is not
normal, the error may
Reference 2.5V±0.1V (-12V
5 be caused by dry
voltage error is taken as the
joint or damage of
ground
U1.
reference)
If TPVREF is normal, Reweld or replace the
The voltage of
the error may be components.
Laser TP2VREF is not
caused by dry joint or
intensity at the normal
damage of varistor
6 control working value
VR1, or improper
reference (the voltage
welding of U2 and the
voltage error shall be
R C components
4V~4.1V)
around.
Output error The voltage of Laser tube damage Reconnect or replace
of laser TPILD is not or connection error the wire, or replace the
7 intensity within the range (the connection is laser tube.
monitoring 1.0~3V (under loose or the wire is
signal TPILD current damaged).
8-25
Hardware System
No. Error Name Criterion Cause Troubleshooting

adjustment 5V voltage error See error 3
conditions) Control signal error or SEe error 4, and check
control circuit error the subsequent circuit.
Dry joint or damage Reweld or replace U3
of U3 and the and the components
components around around.
8.8 Preamplification Board

8.8.1 Overview
The preamplification board performs photoelectric conversion and signal amplification of
the two scatters (FS--forward scatter, also called low angle scatter; SS--side scatter, also
called high angle scatter) from the flow cell. The low angle and high angle amplification
boards share 1 PCB, the amplification times is obtained by welding resistors.
8.8.2 Function
The functions of the preamplification board are: power adjustment, photoelectric conversion
and signal adjustment.
Power adjusting: this module filters the ±12V power from the analog board, the ripple after the
adjustment is lower than 50mV.
Photoelectric conversion: the photoelectric conversion unit converts optical signal to current
signal using photodiode.
Signal adjusting: converts current signal to voltage signal via I/V, and then sends the signal to
the amplification and adjustment unit to process it into signal that meets the input requirement
of the analog board.
Data
Signal adjusting unit
board
Photoelectric Power
FS（ SS adjusting
conversion
(π filtering)
FS/SS
A±12V
preamplification
board
Figure 8-14 Functional diagram of the FS/SS preamplification board
8.8.3 Structure
The PCBA structure of the preamplification board is as follows.
Table 8-22 Modules of the preamplification board

P1 Power source adjustment
P2 Photoelectric conversion
P3 Signal adjustment
8-26
Hardware System
P1
P2
P3
(a) (b)
Figure 8-15 PCBA structure of the preamplification board (a) top (b) bottom
8.8.4 Interfaces
The FS/SS preamplification board has 1 external interface, which is J1 to the motherboard.
The layout of the board is as follows:
Figure 8-16 Interface layout of the FS/SS preamplification board


2 FS/SS Preamplification board < 1V
output voltage signal
3 SHELL Shielding ground - 0
8-27
Hardware System

4 AVSS A-12V analog power I -12V±5%
6 AVCC A+12V analog power I 12V±5%

The preamplification board does not have an indicator, as it may interfere its measurement.
See the following table for the test points.
Table 8-24 Definition of test points on the preamplification board
No. Test point Tested signal Function

1 AGND Analog ground \
2 +12V AVCC +12V power from the analog board
3 -12V AVSS -12V power from the analog board
4 OUT OUT Output signal of FS/SS preamplification board
See the following table to troubleshoot errors of the preamplification board:
Table 8-25 Troubleshooting errors of the preamplification board
Error
No. Criterion Cause Troubleshooting
Name
The connection with the
Reconnect or replace
analog board is loose, or the
The voltage of the wire.
wire is damaged.
test point +12V
Check if the power
is outside the The 12V power sent by the
12V supplied by the analog
range analog board is incorrect.
1 power board is correct.
12V±0.6V, or the
error Dry joint or damage of the
ripple noise is
components related to test
higher than Reweld or replace the
point +12V (such as inductor
50mV. components.
L1, capacitor C24, C27, C20
and C23).
The connection with the
Reconnect or replace
analog board is loose, or the
The voltage of the wire.
wire is damaged.
test point -12V is
Check if the power
outside the The -12V power sent by the
-12V supplied by the analog
range analog board is incorrect.
2 power board is correct.
-12V±0.6V, or
error Dry joint or damage of the
the ripple noise
components related to test
is higher than Reweld or replace the
point -12V (such as inductor
50mV. components.
L2, capacitor C22, C26, C25
and C21).
The FS board is installed to the
SS output signal position of the SS board by Replace the boards.
too weak mistake.
(assuming it is
Output caused by Incorrect resistance, dry joint Reweld or replace the
3
error circuit problem) or damage of R4, R5 or R6. components.
FS output signal The SS board is installed to
too strong the position of the FS board by Replace the boards.
(assuming it is mistake.
8-28
Hardware System
Error
No. Criterion Cause Troubleshooting
Name
caused by
Incorrect resistance, dry joint Reweld or replace the
circuit problem)
or damage of R4, R5 or R6. components.
No output signal
of the Dry joint or damage of Reweld or replace the
preamplification photodiode D1 or R1. components.
board (FF/SS),
or the signal is Dry joint or damage of U2 or Reweld or replace the
too weak. U3. components.
Check the related resistors
Bandwidth error
and capacitors, such as R4,
of the Reweld or replace the
R5, R6, C1, C5 and C4, to see
preamplification components.
if there is any dry joint or
board (FS/SS)
damage.
8.9 Power Board

8.9.1 Overview
The power board BC-5380/BC-5180Auto Hematology Analyzer provides six groups of stable
power, including D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V, P12V and P24V.
EMI circuit 90（ 390V

AC PFC D5V
and rectifier Standby circuit
input circuit
circuit
VCC
Linear
390V circuit Flyback Forward
protectiv protectiv
VDD e circuit e circuit
A+12V
A-12V
Flyback circuit
AC130V
P12V
Forward circuit
P24V
Figure 8-17 Functional diagram of the power board
8.9.2 Function
The power board works under the voltage of (50~60Hz) input by AC 90V~264V.
Once the power switch is on, all circuits start to work, the D5V, A+12V, A-12V, AC130V, P12V
and P24V all have voltage output.
8-29
Hardware System
See the following table for details:

Table 8-26 Characteristics of output voltages
Voltage Load
Minimum Rated Output voltage
Voltage adjustment adjustment Sound
current current range
rate rate
D5V 2A 5A 4.85/5.25V ±1％ ±5% 100mV
+A12V 0mA 1A 11. 5/12. 5V ±1% ±5% 100mV
-A12V 0mA 650mA -11.5/-12.5V ±1% ±5% 100mV
P12V 0.3A 5.5A 11.5/12.5V ±1% ±5% 150mV
P24V 0A 4A 22/27V ±1% ±10% 150mV
AC120V 0mA 60mA 115/145V(RMS) ±1% ±10% /
The highest current generated by the P24V power is 7.8A, whose duration is 2S, cycle is 60S.
8-30
Hardware System
8.9.3 Structure
Figure 8-18 Power board
8.9.4 Interfaces
The power board has 7 external interfaces, 2 of them are sockets (J1 and J2), and the others
are connected to external components with wires (the PCB numbers are TP1～TP20). See the
following figure for position of the interfaces.
8-31
Hardware System
Figure 8-19 Interfaces of power board

The functions of the interfaces are listed in the following table.
Table 8-27 Interfaces of the power board
Welding
disk number
J1 AC input 3 / /
J2 Fan power output 6 / /
Analog section Output via wire
A-J12 power output 6 4 welded to PCB
Output via wire
A-J13 AC output part 3 2 welded to PCB
Power section power Output via wire
A-J35 output 10 10 welded to PCB
Digital section power Output via wire
A-J37 output 4 4 welded to PCB
8-32
Hardware System
 Definition of J1
Table 8-28 Input AC socket
Pin Definition
1 L, connect to the live wire of the grid power.
2 PG, connect to ground wire
3 N, connect to the null wire of the grid power.
 Definition of J2:
Table 8-29 Fan socket
Pin Definition
1/3/5 P12V, connect to positive end of P12V output voltage
2/4/6 PGND, connect to negative end of P12V output voltage
 Definition of pin A－J12

Table 8-30 Definition of analog board outputs
Welding disk Definition Pin

AGND, connect to the reference
TP16AGND\TP17AGND ground of analog board output voltage 6,7
+A12V, connect to positive end of 5
TP15A12V +A12V output voltage
-A12V, connect to negative end of 8
TP18A-12V -A12V output voltage
/ NC 1/2/3/4

Table 8-31 Definition of AC output

TP19\TP20 2 output ends of AC120 1/3
/ NC 2

Table 8-32 Definition of power section power outputs

Positive end of P12V output
TP1P12V/TP2P12V 4/5
voltage
TP12PGND/TP13PGND/TP3PGN PGND, negative end of P12V
6/7/8/9/10
D\TP4PGND\TP14PGND output voltage
Positive end of P24V output
TP9P24V\TP10P24V\TP11P24V 1/2/3
voltage
8-33
Hardware System

Table 8-33 Definition of D5V outputs

Positive end of 5V output
TP5D5V/TP6D5V
voltage 1/2
DGND, negative end of 5V 3/4
TP7DGND/TP8DGND
output voltage

Table 8-34 Definition of debug and test points
No. Pin position Function Reference value

1 Q101.2 Q101 on/off waveform /
2 Q101.1 Q101 drive waveform /
3 C114.+ PFC output voltage 390±20V
4 U101.9 Chip reference voltage output 7.5V
5 U101.14 U101 oscillating waveform /
6 C206.+ VCC voltage 17V~22.5V
7 C204 VDD voltage 12±1V
8 C223 Power supply voltage of U201 12±1V
11 U201.8 U201 reference voltage 5V
13 Q201.3 R235 voltage waveform, Q201 current /
waveform
14 C232.+ D5V output voltage and ripple voltage 5±0.5V
15 C311.+ U301 power supply voltage 12±1V
20 Q303.3 Q303 current waveform, R313 voltage /
waveform
21 C326.+ 12VB voltage 12±0.5V
22 C328.+ 130V DC output 115V~150V
23 C332.+ A+12V output 12±0.5V
24 C338.- A-12V output -12±0.5V
25 U351.15 U351 power supply voltage 12±0.5V
27 U351.11 U351 drive waveform /
34 C409.＋ U401 power supply voltage 12±1V
38 Q406.1 U406 drive waveform /
40 C423.＋ P24V output voltage, ripple 22~27V
8-34
Hardware System
No. Pin position Function Reference value

41 C442.+ P12V output voltage, ripple 12±0.5V
The errors of power board can be troubleshooted as per the following procedure.
Power error
Check the fuse N Are the D5V, VCC

and standby
outputs normal?
circuit
Check the PFC N Is the 390V output

circuit normal?
Is the VDD output N

Check the VDD linear circuit
normal?
A+12V/A-12V/AC130 abnormal
Are the A+12V/A- N indicates flyback converter error（
12V/AC130V（ P12V/P24V
P12V/P24V abnormal indicates
normal?
forward converter error.
Other errors
Figure 8-20 Troubleshooting power board errors

It must be ensured that the power assembly and the main unit cabinet are firmly connected by
screws.
8.10 Fluid Detection Board

8.10.1 Overview
The fluid detection board detects if there is any reagent or diluent. The board gets power
supply from the drive board and sends its own signal to the drive board.
8-35
Hardware System
Fluidic tubes Fluid Power Drive

detection signal board
board
Figure 8-21 The connections of fluid detection board and other boards
8.10.2 Function
The functional diagram of fluid detection board is as follows:
Constant
current drive luminotron
Photoelectri Retarding OUT1
c receiver comparator
circuit
Constant
Switch of the current drive luminotron Photoelectri Retarding OUT2
Power constant circuit c receiver comparator
supply current drive

circuit
Constant
current drive luminotron Photoelectri Retarding OUT3
circuit
Constant
current drive luminotron Photoelectri Retarding OUT4
circuit
Figure 8-22 Functional diagram of fluid detection board
8.10.3 Structure
The fluid detection board PCB:
Top
Bottom
Figure 8-23 Fluid detection board
8-36
Hardware System
8.10.4 Interfaces
Table 8-35 Interfaces of the fluid detection board to the motherboard
Pin Signal name I/O Description Level

1 DGND Ground 0V
2 D5V I Power supply +5V
3 LIQ1 O Fluid detection output 0~+5V
4 LIQ2 signal, high level 5V
5 LIQ3 means there is reagent
6 LIQ4 detected; low level 0V
7 LIQ5 means no reagent.
8 LIQ6
9 D_CTRL_N I Controls the on/off Turn-off voltage:
signals of photocoupler above 3.8V
luminotron, high level Turn-on voltage:
turns off the below 2V
luminotron.
10 DGND Indicated the
connection status of
fluid detection board

Table 8-36 Indicators of the fluid detection board
Position No. Color Description

D1~D4 Green On means there is no fluid in the photocoupler of the
luminotron.
Off means there is fluid in the photocoupler of the
luminotron.
D7 Red On means the fluid detection board is working,
D1~D4 can detect if there is fluid.
Off means the fluid detection board is in standby
mode, D1~D4 cannot detect if there is fluid.
When error occurs to the fluid detection board, the analyzer will report "insufficient reagent".
Troubleshoot the fluid detection board error as per the following procedure:
8-37
Hardware System
The error “insufficient reagent” is

reported
NO NO Is D7(red) in the fluid detection

Is the voltage between
Other errors J1.2 and J1.10 about 5V? board on when the analyzer is
running?
YES
YES
NO
Is the voltage between
Other errors Fluid detection
J1.9 and J1.10 about 0V? Is the on/off status of D1~D4(green) in the NO board error
fluid detection board consistent with the
fluid status detected by the photocouplers?
YES
Fluid detection YES

board error
Voltage of the LIQ locus of NO Fluid detection

D1~D4 in J1 is above 4V board error
when on, and below 1V when
off
YES
Other errors
Figure 8-24 Troubleshooting procedure
8.11 Indicator Board

8.11.1 Overview
The indicator board is connected with the digital control board, it receives signals from the
digital control board to indicate analyzer status.
8.11.2 Function
The indicator board has 2 basic functions:
Status indicating: the indicating system of the indicator board consists of 3 colors, which are
red, yellow and green, indicating different status of the analyzer.
Sound alarming: the buzzer in the indicator board provides sound alarm function when error
occurs.
8-38
Hardware System
8.11.3 Structure
Top
Bottom
Figure 8-25 The indicator board
8.11.4 Interfaces
The indicator board has 1 interface, J1. The definition of J1 is listed in the following table.
PIN Signal Description

Green indicator control signal, on when the electric
1 GREEN_LED
level is high, off when the level is low.
Yellow indicator control signal, on when the electric
2 YELLOW_LED
level is high, off when the level is low.
Red indicator control signal, on when the electric level
3 RED_LED
is high, off when the level is low.
4 GND Digital ground
Buzzer control signal, the buzzer beeps when electric
5 BUZ_N
level is low, and vice versa.
6 GND Digital ground
7 VCC 5V power, supplies power to the buzzer and indicator.
8 \ Reserved

Definitions of test points on the indicator board are listed in the following table.
Table 8-38 List of indicator board test points
Test Printed
Function Note
point label
Normal voltage range
TP1 VCC Test point of 5V power
4.75V-5.25V
Normal voltage range
TP2 GND Ground test point
4.75V-5.25V
Test point of green
TP3 / 3.3V TTL level
indicator control signal
8-39
Hardware System
Test Printed
Function Note
point label
Test point of yellow
indicator control signal
Test point of red indicator
control signal
When the indicator is on, the
Test point of green
TP6 / electric level is low; when it is
indicator working status
off, the electric level is high (5V).
Test point of yellow
indicator working status
Test point of red indicator
working status
There are 2 types of frequent indicator board error:
 The indicator fails to work as intended
Possible cause: the wire is not firmly connected to J1, or the indicator is damaged.
Solution: reconnect or replace the wire, or replace the LED indicator.
 The buzzer fails to work as intended
Possible cause: the wire is not firmly connected to J1, or the buzzer is damaged.
Solution: reconnect or replace the wire, or replace the buzzer.
8.12 Key Board

8.12.1 Overview
The key board controls the [ASPIRATE] and [OPEN] keys to enable human machine
interface during the autoloading/manual loading process.
8.12.2 Function
The key board has 2 basic functions:
Human machine interface by the [ASPIRATE] key: users press the [ASPIRATE] key to start
autoloading analysis.
Human machine interface by the [OPEN] key: users press the [OPEN] key to open the sample
compartment door.
8-40
Hardware System
8.12.3 Structure
Figure 8-26 The key board
8.12.4 Interfaces
The key board has only 1 external interface, J1.
PIN Name Description Level

1 / / /
2 COUNT_KEY ASPIRATE key 3.3V TTL
3 INSERT_KEY OPEN key 3.3V TTL
4 GND Ground 0-0.2V

None.
Frequent error: the keys do not respond to pressing.
Possible cause: the wire is not firmly connected to J1, or the key is damaged.
Solution: reconnect the wire; if the error still exist, replace the key board.
8.13 Mini Network Board

8.13.1 Overview
The mini network board divides the channel in which the data board communicates the PC
into 2 parts, it is the transit point of the internal and external network cable of the analyzer.
8.13.2 Function
The mini network board provides direct connection to the 2 RJ45 connector in and outside
the analyzer. See the following figure:
8-41
Hardware System
Figure 8-27 Functional diagram of the network board
8.13.3 Structure
The PCB of the mini network board (top and bottom) is as follows:
Figure 8-28 Top and bottom of mini network board PCBA
8.13.4 Interfaces
The pin definitions of J1 and J2 interfaces are the same, see the following table:
Table 8-40 Description of mini network board interfaces and pins
Pin Signal name I/O Description Level

1 TX_P I Connected to data board UTP
TX_P
2 TX_N I Connected to data board UTP
TX_N
3 RX_P O Connected to data board UTP
RX_P
4 CT1_P I/O Connected to data board UTP
CT1_P
5 CT1_N I/O Connected to data board UTP
CT1_N
6 RX_N O Connected to data board UTP
RX_N
7 CT2_P I/O Connected to data board UTP
CT2_P
8 CT2_N I/O Connected to data board UTP
CT2_N
8-42
Hardware System

There is no indicator or test point in the board.
Table 8-41 Troubleshooting the mini network board
Error
Cause of error Troubleshooting method
phenomenon
Step 1: Check if the network cable connection is
loose. If yes, reconnect the cable and see if the
1. The network
problem is solved; if no, go to step 2.
cable is not
Step 2: Take out the mini network board, and
The PC cannot properly
test the conducting state of the pins of J1 and
communicate connected;
J2. See the figure above for pin definition of J1
with BC-5380 or 2. The cable is
and J2. If pin 1-8 of J1 are conducted with pin
BC-5180 damaged or poor
1-8 of J2, the mini network board is normal, the
contact of the
error may be caused by some other part of the
interface
analyzer; otherwise the mini network is
damaged and must be replaced.
The table above can be represented by the flow chart below:

The PC fails to
communicate with
BC-5380/BC-5180
YES
Reconnect the
Does the cable connected to mini
cable network board get loose?
NO
YES
Can pin 1~8 of J1 be
Other errors
conducted with pin
1~8 of J2
NO
Mini network
board error
Figure 8-29 Troubleshooting the mini network board
8.14 List of Prefixes of Board Sockets

Table 8-42 List of Prefixes of Board Sockets
Socket
No. Board No. Board Name Unit Labeling
Prefix
1 051-001146-00 Power board PCBA 1 A A-J1…
Pinaster main control
2 051-000985-00 1 B B-J1...
board PCBA
3 051-000982-00 Analog board PCBA 1 C C-J1…
8-43
Hardware System
Socket
No. Board No. Board Name Unit Labeling
Prefix
4 051-000981-00 Drive board PCBA 1 D D-J1…
Autoloading Board
5 051-000393-00 1 E E-J1…
PCBA
6 051-001062-00 Indicator board PCBA 1 G G-J1…
7 3102-30-69197 Key Board 1 H H-J1…

Fluid detection board
8 051-000983-00 1 I I-J1…
PCBA
9 3101-30-68513 Laser Control Board 1 J J-J1…
FS Preamplification
10 3101-30-68515 1 K K-J1…
Board
SS Preamplification
11 3101-30-68517 1 L L-J1…
Board
Mini Network Board
12 051-001122-00 1 M M-J1…
PCBA
24V- to-13V power
13 051-001130-00 1 N N-J1…
module PCBA
8.15 Connections Lines and Boards

Table 8-43 Connections of lines and boards
Position
Board Name Line Name Part No. Connected to
No.
P24V,P12V and D5V
D5V, P12V and P24V
J11 009-002601-00 power patching line
power extension line
(009-002286-00)
Mini network board

J1 Network patching line 009-002561-00
(051-001122-00) -J2
Indicator/key board Indicator board

009-002245-00
connection line (051-001062-00) -J1
J78
Pinaster main Open vial model
Indicator board
control board indicator board 009-002500-00
(051-001062-00) -J1
PCBA connection line
051-000985-00
Sample compartment
Door detection and
door detection and
009-002519-00 optical module
optical module
micro-switch
J79 connection line
Door detection and Door detection and
aspirate key 009-002274-00 aspirate key
connection line micro-switch
Digital control board
Drive board PCBA
J81 and drive board 009-002275-00
(051-000981-00) -J13
connection line
8-44
Hardware System
Position
No.
Data board and
Autoloading board
autoloading board
J8 009-002271-00 PCBA (051-000393-00)
serial port connection
-J11, J12
line
Main control board Analog board PCBA

J85 009-002227-00
high-speed analog line (051-000982-00) -J7
Main control board Analog board PCBA

J86 009-002228-00
low-speed analog line (051-000982-00) -J8
Main control analog Analog board PCBA

J77 009-002229-00
board digital line (051-000982-00) -J9
J1 RBC/PLT signal line 3102-20-69109 RBC bath
J2 WBC signal line 3102-20-69113 WBC bath
FS preamplification
board
Optical system signal (3101-30-68515)-J1
J3 009-002225-00
line and SS preamplification
board
(3101-30-68517)-J1
J4 HGB signal line 3102-20-69112 WBC bath
Analog board A±12V and AC120V

A±12V and AC120V
PCBA J5 009-002603-00 power output line
051-000982-00 (009-002287-00)
A±12V and AC120V
A±12V and AC120V
J24 009-002603-00 power output line
(009-002287-00)
Optical system control Laser control board

J6 009-002226-00
line (3101-30-68513) -J1
Main control analog Pinaster main control

J7 board high-speed 009-002227-00 board PCBA
analog line (051-000985-00) -J85
Main control analog Pinaster main control
J8 board low-speed 009-002228-00 board PCBA
analog line (051-000985-00) -J86
Main control analog
J9 009-002229-00 board PCBA
board digital line
(051-000985-00) -J77
Drive board Connection line of
PCBA J2 drive board valve 009-002272-00 Valve 13-28
051-000981-00 13-29
8-45
Hardware System
Position
No.
Connection line of
J3 009-002284-00 Valve 1-12
drive board valve 1-12
J4 Pump connection line 009-002279-00 Pump 1-4
D5V and P12V power

D5V and P12V power
J6 009-002602-00 output line
extension line
(009-002514-00)
Fluid detection board Fluid detection board

J7 009-002280-00
Temperature sensor
J8 009-002276-00 Temperature sensor
connection line
Float switch
J9 009-002278-00 Float switch
connection line
Sample collection
assembly Sample collection
J10 009-002288-00
photocoupler assembly photocoupler
connection line
Syringe photocoupler
J11 009-002289-00 Syringe photocoupler
connection line
Digital control board Pinaster main control

J13 and drive board 009-002275-00 board PCBA
J14 Heater connection line 009-002277-00 Heater
P24V,P12V and D5V

D5V, P12V and P24V
J15 009-002601-00 power patching line
(009-002286-00)
Sample collection
Sample collection
J16 assembly motor 009-002466-00
assembly motor
connection line
ASP_SP syringe ASP motor and SP

J17 009-002458-00
motor connection line motor
SH syringe assembly
J18 009-002457-00 SH motor
motor connection line
LYSE_DIL syringe
LYSE and DIL syringe
J19 assembly motor 009-002283-00
motor
connection line
Autoloading
Electromagnet Sample compartment
board PCBA J3 3102-20-69103-04
connection line electromagnet
051-000393-00
8-46
Hardware System
Position
No.
Power board PCBA
P24V,P12V and D5V
J5 009-002286-00 (051-001146-00) -A-J37
power patching line
and A-J35
Mix mechanism
Mix mechanism
J6 photocoupler 009-002516-00
photocoupler
connection line
Autoloading
mechanism position Autoloading sensor
J7 3102-20-69103-01
sensor connection line group 1
1
Autoloading
mechanism position Autoloading sensor
J8 3102-20-69103-02
sensor connection line group 2
2
Data board and
autoloading board
J11 009-002271-00 board PCBA
(051-000985-00) -J8
line
Data board and
autoloading board
J12 009-002271-00 board PCBA
(051-000985-00) -J8
line
Autoloading
Loading motor lateral
J14 mechanism motor 3102-20-69103-03
and longitudinal motors
connection line
Mix mechanism motor Mix mechanism X and

J15 009-002517-00
connection line 1 Z motor
Mix mechanism motor

J16 009-002518-00 Mix motor
connection line 2
Optical system control Analog board PCBA

J1 009-002226-00
Laser control line (051-000982-00) -J6
board
3101-30-68513
J2 Laser connection line 3101-21-68593 Laser
FS
preamplification Optical system signal Analog board PCBA
J1 009-002225-00
board line (051-000982-00) -J3
3101-30-68515
SS
preamplification Optical system signal Analog board PCBA
J1 009-002225-00
board line (051-000982-00) -J3
3101-30-68517
Power board
Switch and power
PCBA J1 3101-20-68589 Power switch
board connection line
051-001146-00
8-47
Hardware System
Position
No.
A±12V and A±12V and AC120V
A-J12 AC120Vpower output 009-002287-00 power extension line
line (009-002603-00)
A±12V and A±12V and AC120V
A-J13 AC120Vpower output 009-002287-00 power extension line
line (009-002603-00)
D5V, P12V and P24V
P24V,P12V and D5V
009-002286-00 power extension line
power patching line
(009-002601-00)
A-J35
D5V and P12V power
D5V and P12V power
009-002514-00 extension line
output line
(009-002602-00)
D5V, P12V and P24V
P24V,P12V and D5V
A-J37 009-002286-00 power extension line
power patching line
(009-002601-00)
Fluid detection
Fluid detection board Drive board PCBA
board J1 009-002280-00
051-000983-00
Network cable
J1 (connecting the 009-000043-00 Analyzer PC
Mini network analyzer to PC)
board
051-001122-00 Pinaster main control
J2 Network patching line 009-002561-00 board PCBA
(051-000985-00) -J1
P24V,P12V and D5V
D5V, P12V and P24V
24V-to-13V J1 009-002601-00 power patching line
power module (009-002286-00)
PCBA Connection line of
051-001130-00 J2 drive board valve 009-002272-00 Valve 28
13-29
Indicator/key board
009-002245-00 board PCBA
connection line
Indicator board (051-000985-00) -J78
J1
051-001062-00 Open vial model Pinaster main control
indicator board 009-002500-00 board PCBA
Key board Indicator/key board
J1 009-002245-00 board PCBA
3102-30-69197 connection line
(051-000985-00) -J78
8.16 Motors, Photocouplers and Micro-switches

Table 8-44 Connections of wires and components of the autoloading board
Name Wire label Connected to
Motor SFXM Lateral feeding motor
8-48
Hardware System
SFYM Longitudinal feeding motor
MX Mix assembly extension motor
MZ Mix assembly lift motor
MR Mix assembly mix motor

Mix assembly extension mechanism start
MX-START
photocoupler
Mix assembly extension mechanism end
MX-END
photocoupler
MZ-START Mix assembly lift mechanism start photocoupler
MZ-END Mix assembly lift mechanism end photocoupler
MR-START Mix assembly mix motor start position photocoupler
FX_START X loading motor start position photocoupler
FX_END X loading motor end position photocoupler
FY_START Y loading motor start position photocoupler

Motors and
FUL_START Unloading start position photocoupler
Micro-switches
FY_LEFT Y left feeding photocoupler
FY_RIGHT Y right feeding photocoupler
FX_READY X loading ready micro-switch
FUL_FULL Unloading tray full detection photocoupler
SAMPLE/RACK Tube rack detection photocoupler
FY_READY Y feeding ready photocoupler
F-TUBE Tube detection photocoupler
DOOR Door status detection photocoupler
Table 8-45 Connections of wires and components of the power drive board
P1-PRESS Press pump
Pump P2-WASTE Waste pump
P3-VACUUM Vacuum pump
8-49
Hardware System
Valve V1-V28 Valve 1 - valve 28
AMBIENT Ambient temperature sensor
T1-OPTI Optical system temperature sensor
Temperature sensor T2-DIFF DIFF bath temperature sensor
T3-DIL Diluent temperature sensor
T4-RBC_DIL RBC liquid inlet temperature sensor
F1-WASTE Waste float switch

Float switch
F2-DIL Diluent float switch
Sample collection assembly X motor start
SEN1-X_INIT
Sample collection assembly X motor
Sample collection SEN2-X_POS
assembly
photocoupler Sample collection assembly Y motor start
SEN3-Y_START
Pressure relief valve detection
SEN5-VALVE
photocoupler
SEN6-ASP ASP syringe photocoupler
SEN7-SP SP syringe photocoupler
Syringe photocoupler SEN8-SH SH syringe photocoupler
SEN9-DIL DIL syringe photocoupler
SEN10-LYSE LYSE syringe photocoupler
HT1-OPTI Optical system heater
HT2-DIFF DIFF bath heater
HT3-DIL Diluent heater

Heater assembly
TS1-OPTI Optical system temperature switch
TS2-DIFF DIFF bath temperature switch
TS3-DIL Diluent temperature switch
M1-X Sample collection assembly X motor

Sample collection
assembly motor
M2-Y Sample collection assembly Y motor
Syringe motor M3-ASP ASP motor
8-50
Hardware System
M4-SP SP motor
M5-SH SH motor
M6-DIL DIL motor
M7-LYSE LYSE motor
Table 8-46 List of wires and micro-switches of digital control board
K1-ASPIRATE Aspirate key micro-switch
Micro-switch K2-R_DOOR Right door micro-switch
K3-OPTICS Optical module micro-switch
8.17 Analyzer Status Indicated by the Indicators

The analyzer status can be told from the following two aspects.
Analyzer power indicator: the power indicator is on the left plate, as shown in the following
figure. The power indicator is in static green after the power switch in turned on, which
shows the power supply of the analyzer is normal. If the indicator is off after the power
switch is turned on, that means the power supply of the analyzer is abnormal or the
indicator is damaged, the analyzer shall not be started until the problem is solved.
Figure 8-30 Power indicator
Analyzer working status indicator: the indicator is in the front cover of the analyzer, it
indicated the analyzer status using 3 different colors.
Table 8-47 Analyzer status indicated by the indicator
Analyzer status Indicator status
Power-off Off
8-51
Hardware System
Analyzer status Indicator status
Ready Static green
Running Flickering green
Running with error Flickering red
Error, not running Static red

Fluidic actions not allowed,
Static yellow
no error
Supporting superimposition
of sample analyzing Flickering yellow
sequences
8-52
9 Mechanical System
9.1 Analyzer Structure
The instrument is composed of the main unit (including the autoloader) and the PC, as well as
the 3 lyses and diluent connected to it.
9.2 Appearance
The front of the analyzer is shown as Figure9-1.
Figure 9-1 Front of the analyzer
1 ---- Front cover 2 ---- Power/Status indicator

3 ---- [OPEN] key 4 --- [RUN] key
5 ---- Tube 6 ---- 53-series tube rack assembly
7 ---- Tube 8 ---- Tube adapter
9 ---- Sample compartment door
9-1
Mechanical System
The back of the main unit is shown as Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Back of the analyzer
1 --- Network interface 2 --- M-53D Diluent connector

3 --- M-53LH Lyse connector 4 --- M-53LEO(II) Lyse connector
5 --- M-53LEO(I) Lyse connector 6 --- Power input socket
7 --- Waste connector
9-2
Mechanical System
9.3 Layout Introduction

Components of the front cover are shown in Figure 9-3 .
Figure 9-3 Front of the analyzer (front cover open)
1 --- Front cover 2 --- Sampling assembly

3 ---- Tube 4 ---- 53-series tube rack assembly
5 --- Syringe 6 --- Fluidic valves
7 --- Relieve valve assembly
9-3
Mechanical System
The side view of the analyzer with the sample compartment door open is shown in Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Side view of the analyzer (sample compartment door open)
1 ---- Tube holder 2 ---- Tube adapter

3 ---- Sample compartment door
9-4
Mechanical System
The layout of the components on the right plate are shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5 Right side of the analyzer (right door open)
1 --- Optical system 2 --- Sampling assembly

3 --- Vacuum chamber 4 --- Reagent heating chamber
5 --- Fluidic valves 6 --- Vacuum pump/Waste pump
7 --- Measurement bath 8 --- DIFF bath
9 --- Mixing assembly
9-5
Mechanical System
The layout of the components on the left plate are shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6 Left side of the analyzer (left door open)
1 --- Air pump 2 --- Syringe

3 --- Pressure chamber 4 --- Liquid level detection unit
5 --- Fluidic valves 6 --- Power switch
7 --- Circuit board
9-6
Mechanical System
9.4 Autoloading Assembly

Structure Introduction
4
5
3
2 Y X
8 7 6
Figure 9-7 Autoloader
1 --- Reflective sensor 2 --- Unloading unit

3 --- Feeding counter 4 --- Tube detection assembly
5 --- Micro-switch 6 --- Loading unit (X-direction loading)
7 --- Feeding unit (Y-direction feeding) 8 ---- Sample compartment door
Figure 9-8 Autoloader (top cover not included to show the sensor position)
1 --- X-direction loading start sensor 2 --- X-direction loading end sensor
3 --- Tube detection position counting sensor 4 --- Tube piercing position counting sensor
5 --- Y-direction feeding start sensor 6 --- Unloading sensor
9-7
Mechanical System
Note: sample compartment assembly sensors

are not included in the figure.
Figure 9-9 Unloading unit
1 --- Unloading sensor 2 --- Bracket

3 --- Wheel and rack assembly
Figure 9-10 Loading unit
1 --- Step motor 2 --- Linear track

3 --- Loading push plate 4 --- Sensor (X-direction loading start sensor)
5 --- Sensor (X-direction loading end sensor) 6 ---Bracket
9-8
Mechanical System
Figure 9-11 Loading unit
1 --- Pawl 2 --- Step motor

3 --- Feeding slide plate 4 --- Y-direction feeding start sensor
5 --- Right sensor (tube detection position 6 --- left sensor (tube piercing position
counting sensor) counting sensor)
Figure 9-12 Sample compartment assembly
1 --- Bracket 2 --- Draw spring

3---Sensor 4---Sensor barrier
5 --- Torsional spring 6 ---Damp gear
7 --- Electromagnet
9-9
Mechanical System
Figure 9-13 Sample compartment electromagnet assembly
1 --- Electromagnet coil frame 2 --- Electromagnet core

3 --- Electromagnet installation bracket 4 --- Guide bushing
9.4.1 Relevant Troubleshooting Measures

Trigger of
Error Code Error Name Troubleshooting/Solution
Error Report
0x01005700 X-direction 1. Check if the software, sequence, and
loading autoloader versions are correct.
motor in Software 2. Click "Remove Error".
action command 3. Restart the software and the
sending delay analyzer.
0x01005701 X-direction 1. Check if the sensors are OK: see if
loading the they are in different state when
motor action blocked and not blocked.
error 1 2. Find the sensor with error and
remove it. Check if there is dust or
splashed fluid covering the glittering
side.
The X-direction 3. Wipe the sensor and mount it back to
loading start see if the error can be removed. If not,
sensors are not replace with a new one. 4. Click
blocked when "Remove Error".
they are 5. Check if there is interference
supposed to be between the loading unit and the cover
blocked of the autoloader.
0x01005702 X-direction 1. Make sure there is no tube rack in the
loading tube rack position/
motor 2. Click "Remove Error".
current 3. Check if the micro-switch is OK: see
action if it is in different state when blocked
forbidden and not blocked.
Tube rack or 4. Check if the cables are properly
micro-switch connected to the micro-switch. 5. If the
blocked in error still exists, replace the
Y-direction micro-switch with a new one.
0x01005703 X-direction The end 1. Confirm the current position of the
loading position loading mechanism.
motor action sensors are 2. If it is between the start position and
error 2 blocked when the end position: a. check if there is any
9-10
Mechanical System
Trigger of
Error Report
the loading interference along the loading pathway
mechanism is (e.g. interference with the cover,
at the start obstacle on the loading tray, tube rack
position; or the improperly placed, etc.); b. if there is no
end position interference, check if the motor is OK,
sensors are not and the cables are properly connected
blocked when to it.
the loading 3. If it is at the start or end position,
mechanism is check if the sensors are OK: the
at the end sensors are in different state when
position blocked and not blocked, and the
cables are all properly connected to
them.
0x01005704 X-direction 1. Before troubleshooting, make sure all
loading cables of the related parts are properly
motor sensor connected, e.g. if the cables are well
error connected to the sensors, if the sensor
cables are connected to the correct
positions according to the labels.
2. Check if there is any obstacle
blocking the sensors.
3. Click "Remove Error" to see if the
error can be removed.
4. Check if the sensors are OK: see if
the they are in different state when
The start blocked and not blocked.
position 5. Find the sensor with error and
sensors and remove it. Check if there is dust or
end position splashed fluid covering the glittering
sensors of the side.
loading tray are 7. Wipe the sensor and mount it back to
blocked at the see if the error can be removed. If not,
same time replace with a new one.
0x01005705 X-direction 1. If there is no tube rack on the loading
loading tray: could be X-direction loading end
motor position sensor error. Check if the end
loading error position sensors are OK.
2. If there is/are tube rack(s) on the
loading tray: a. the micro-switch is not
After the pressed by any tube rack: check for
loading is obstacle or interference on the loading
completed, if tray; check if all tube racks are correctly
both the loading placed (make it unable to press the
end position micro-switch); b. the micro-switch is
sensors and pressed by tube rack: check if the
tube detection micro-switch works properly.
micro-switch 3. If all the items above are checked to
are not blocked, be OK, check if the loading motor works
the error will be properly and all the cables are properly
reported connected to it.
0x01005708 Loading 1. Before troubleshooting, make sure all
micro-switch cables of the related parts are properly
error connected, e.g. if the cables are well
Micro-switch connected to the sensors, if the sensor
error: it is cables are connected to the correct
detected to be positions according to the labels.
pressed when it 2. Check if there is any obstacle
is not pressed blocking the sensors.
9-11
Mechanical System
Trigger of
Error Report
blocked and not blocked.
5. Check if the sensors work improperly,
or the micro-switch is aged that could
be not able to go up and down properly.
0x01005900 Y-direction 1. Check if the software, sequence, and
feeding autoloader versions are correct.
motor in Software 2. Click "Remove Error".
action command 3. Restart the software and the
sending delay analyzer.
0x01005901 Y-direction when there is
motor tube rack along
initialization the feeding
forbidden pathway, the
error will be
reported when
the autoloading 1. Remove the tube rack.
count is started 2. Click "Remove Error".
0x01005902 Unloading The unloading 1. If the unloading tray sensors are
action error tray sensors confirmed to be blocked, remove the
are blocked, tube racks on the tray.
which means 2. If there is no tube rack on the
that the unloading tray. check if the sensors
unloading tray work properly and all cables are well
is full connected.
0x01005903 Y-direction 1. Check if all software and hardware
feeding versions are correct.
motor action 2. Before troubleshooting, make sure all
error cables of the related parts are properly
connected, e.g. if the cables are well
connected to the motor and sensors, if
the sensor cables are connected to the
correct positions according to the
labels, if the motor cables are
connected to the correct positions
according to the labels.
4. Perform feeding mechanism self-test
at the "Self-Test" screen, and see if the
The Y-direction blocked and not blocked.
feeding start 6. For sensor error, find the sensor with
position error and remove it. Check if there is
sensors are dust or splashed fluid covering the
blocked when glittering side.
they are 7. Wipe the sensor and mount it back to
supposed to be see if the error can be removed. If not,
not blocked, or replace with a new one.
not blocked 8. If the error still exists, check the
when they are motor to see if it does not reach the
supposed to be sensor position because of step loss or
blocked. operation obstruction (less likely to
9-12
Mechanical System
Trigger of
Error Report
happen).
0x01005904 Unloading 1. Check if all software and hardware
position versions are correct.
sensor error 2. Before troubleshooting, make sure all
cables of the related parts are properly
connected to the sensors, if the sensor
cables are connected to the correct
positions according to the labels.
error can be removed;
5. Check if the unloading mechanism
works properly, and if the gear rack can
run out properly. If the gear rack cannot
run out or cannot reach the sensor
The unloading detection area, check the mechanism;
start position 6. Check if the sensors are OK: see if
sensors are the they are in different state when
blocked when blocked and not blocked;
they are 7. For sensor error, find the sensor with
supposed to be error and remove it. Check if there is
not blocked, or dust or splashed fluid covering the
not blocked glittering side.
when they are 8. Wipe the sensor and mount it back
supposed to be to see if the error can be removed. If
blocked. not, replace with a new one.
0x01005905 Y-direction The Y-direction 1. Check if all software and hardware
right sensor feeding right versions are correct.
error sensors are 2. Before troubleshooting, make sure all
blocked when cables of the related parts are properly
they are connected, e.g. if the cables are well
supposed to be connected to the motor and sensors, if
not blocked, or the sensor cables are connected to the
not blocked correct positions according to the
when they are labels, if the motor cables are
supposed to be connected to the correct positions
blocked. according to the labels.
0x01005906 Y-direction 3. Click "Remove Error" to see if the
left sensor error can be removed;
error 4. Perform feeding mechanism self-test
The Y-direction blocked and not blocked;
feeding left 6. For sensor error, find the sensor with
sensors are error and remove it. Check if there is
blocked when dust or splashed fluid covering the
they are glittering side;
supposed to be 7 Wipe the sensor and mount it back to
not blocked, or see if the error can be removed. If not,
not blocked replace with a new one;
when they are 8. If the error still exists, check the
supposed to be motor to see if it does not reach the
blocked. sensor position because of step loss or
9-13
Mechanical System
Trigger of
Error Report
operation obstruction (less likely to
happen).
0x01005908 Y-direction 1. Check if all software and hardware
feeding versions are correct.
motor 2. Before troubleshooting, make sure all
feeding error cables of the related parts are properly
connected to the motor and sensors, if
the sensor cables are connected to the
correct positions according to the
labels, if the motor cables are
connected to the correct positions
according to the labels.
blocked and not blocked;
6. For sensor error, find the sensor with
error and remove it. Check if there is
Y-direction dust or splashed fluid covering the
feeding start glittering side;
sensor not 7 Wipe the sensor and mount it back to
blocked, which see if the error can be removed. If not,
means the replace with a new one;
motor is not at 8. If the error still exists, check the
the start motor to see if it does not reach the
position, and sensor position because of step loss or
the feeding is operation obstruction (less likely to
forbidden happen).
0x01005909 Y-direction Error reported
feeding in the following
motor cases:
unloading 1. Y-direction
error feeding start
position
sensors not 1. Check the state of the Y-direction
blocked feeding start position sensors and that
2. Unloading of the unloading start position sensors,
start position and make sure they are OK and the
sensors not cables are properly connected;
blocked 2. Check if there is any interference in
3. Left sensor the feeding process, which make the
counter not 0 tube rack not fully pass the left sensor
0x0100590D Y-direction 1. Make sure the tube racks are used;
left and right 2. Make sure there is no obstacle along
sensors Unexpected the feeding pathway;
cooperation hop of the left 3. Make sure the left and right sensors,
error and right as well as all cables connected to them
sensors while are OK;
pushing the 4. Make sure the sensor barriers are
tube rack well mounted
0x0100590F Tube Tube detection 1. Check if there is a tube rack with
detection sensor blocked tube(s) at the tube detection position;
sensor after 2. If no, check if the tube detection
9-14
Mechanical System
Trigger of
Error Report
blocked after initialization sensors are OK; place a tube at the
initialization. tube detection position, and check if the
sensors are in different state when
blocked and not blocked;
3. Check if there is an obstacle along
the pathway of L sensor detection;
4. Wipe the sensors and check if they
work properly;
5. If the error still exists, replace the
tube detection sensors with a new pair
0x01005910 Right sensor 1. Check if there is any obstacle along
damaged or the tube rack feeding pathway which
unable to prevent the tube rack from moving;
drag the 2. Check if all software and hardware
tube rack Right sensor versions are correct;
does not 3. Check if all cables connected to the
change after right sensor are properly connected,
trying the and if there is any damage;
feeding action 4. Check if the right sensor is OK: press
for 5 times, the spring leaf, and check if the sensor
which is is in normal state;
probably 5. Check if the sensor barrier is properly
because the mounted, and if the sensor is blocked
right sensor is when pressing the barrier;
damaged or 6. Replace the cables, and check if the
unable to drag sensor works properly;
the tube rack 7. Replace the sensor
0x01005a01 Opening Unable to open 1. Check if the software, autoloading
sample the sample board MCU and FPGA versions are
compartment compartment correct; check if the autoloading board
door failed door 24V, 12V, 5V powers are normal;
/ / 2. Check if the sample compartment
door is open; if it is open, check if the
compartment door detection sensors
and the cables connected to them are
OK;
3. If the door is not open, check if the
electromagnet cable is well connected;
4. Pull the tail of the electromagnet to
open and close the compartment door,
and see if there is interference or
obstruction. Check if the jump ring of
the electromagnet core falls off;
5. If the jump ring falls off, install a new
one;
6. If there is obstruction, remove the
electromagnet assembly from the
sample compartment assembly, and
then remove the guide bushing.
Remount the guide bushing and make
sure there is no obstruction between the
bushing and the protruded axle of the
magnet core (rotate the core in different
directions, and there should be no
obstruction);
Closing sample 7. Mount the electromagnet assembly
compartment back to the sample compartment
door failed assembly, and check if the
9-15
Mechanical System
Trigger of
Error Report
compartment door can be opened.
Note: make sure the sample probe is
not inside the sample compartment
while opening and closing the
compartment door.
0x01005a04 Adjustment This error only occurs in the position
parameter adjustment performed by manufacture
out of range or service engineers
Value out of Re-adjust when this error is reported
range while (according to F-3102-CTO-01
adjusting Instrument Adjustment Procedure
0x01005a05 Read 1 Check if the software, autoloading
scanner board MCU and FPGA versions are
error correct; check if the autoloading board
24V, 12V, 5V powers are normal;
2. Check if the cables to the scanner
are well connected;
Read scanner 3. Restart the instrument, and see if the
error. No error still exists;
message sent 4. If the error still exists, replace the
back in 500ms scanner
9-16
Mechanical System
9.5 Mixing Assembly

9.5.1 Structure Introduction
Figure 9-14 Structure of the mixing assembly
1 --- Z-direction motor 2 --- Z-direction end sensor

3 --- Z-direction start sensor 4 --- X-direction end sensor
5 --- X-direction start sensor 6 --- X-direction motor
7 --- Mixing motor 8 --- Mixing start sensor

Error Trigger of Error
Error Code Troubleshooting/Solution
Name Report
0x01005500 Mixing Z-direction motor
motor not at the end
current position or 1. Check if both the Z-direction motor and
action not X-direction motor X-direction motor are at the end position;
allowed not at the end 2. Check if the Z-direction motor,
position, so the X-direction motor, and all cables
action is not connected to them are OK;
allowed 3. Click "Remove Error"
9-17
Mechanical System

Name Report
0x01005501 Mixing 1. Check if the software, sequence and
motor in autoloading versions are correct;
action Software 2. Click "Remove Error;"
command 3. Restart the software and the
sending delay instrument
0x01005502 Mixing The start position
motor sensors are
action error blocked when the
motor is not
supposed to be at
the start position;
SMRM start
position sensor or 1. Check if all software and hardware
motor error versions are correct.
0x01005503 Mixing The start position 2. Before troubleshooting, make sure all
motor sensors are not cables of the related parts are properly
action error blocked when the connected, e.g. if the cables are well
motor is connected to the motor and sensors, if
supposed to be at the sensor cables are connected to the
the start position; correct positions according to the labels,
SMRM start if the motor cables are connected to the
position sensor or correct positions according to the labels.
motor error 3. Click "Remove Error" to see if the error
0x01005504 Mixing Z-direction motor can be removed;
motor not at the end 4. Perform mixing mechanism self-test at
action not position or the "Self-Test" screen, and see if the
allowed Z-direction motor error can be removed;
not at the end 5. Check if the sensors are OK: see if the
position, so the they are in different state when blocked
action is not and not blocked;
allowed 6. For sensor error, find the sensor with
0x01005507 Motor not End position error and remove it. Check if there is dust
supposed sensors are or splashed fluid covering the glittering
to be at the blocked when the side;
end motor is not 7 Wipe the sensor and mount it back to
position supposed to be at see if the error can be removed. If not,
the end position; replace with a new one;
SMRM end 8. If the error still exists, check the motor
position sensor or to see if it does not reach the sensor
motor error position because of step loss or
0x01005508 Motor End position operation obstruction (less likely to
supposed sensors are not happen).
to be at the blocked when the
end motor is
position supposed to be at
the end position;
SMRM end
position sensor or
motor error
0x01005606 Mixing Current 1. Check if all software and hardware
mechanism pinching/mixing versions are correct.
current action forbidden 2. Before troubleshooting, make sure all
action (because at least cables of the related parts are properly
forbidden one of the 3 connected, e.g. if the cables are well
motors of the connected to the motor and sensors, if
mixing assembly the sensor cables are connected to the
is not at the start correct positions according to the labels,
position) if the motor cables are connected to the
9-18
Mechanical System

Name Report
correct positions according to the labels.
3. Click "Remove Error" to see if the error
can be removed;
4. Perform mixing mechanism self-test at
the "Self-Test" screen, and see if the
5. Check if the sensors are OK: see if the
they are in different state when blocked
and not blocked;
6. For sensor error, find the sensor with
error and remove it. Check if there is dust
or splashed fluid covering the glittering
side;
7 Wipe the sensor and mount it back to
see if the error can be removed. If not,
replace with a new one;
8. If the error still exists, check the motor
to see if it does not reach the sensor
position because of step loss or
operation obstruction (less likely to
happen).
9.6 Sampling Assembly

The sampling assembly is designed to aspirate, dispense, and mix the samples. The
sample probe moves in two directions:
1. X-Direction: go to the sampling, DIFF, WBC, RBC positions, and complete sample mixing;
2. Y-Direction: complete sample fetching, sample probe cleaning, etc.
Figure 9-15 The structure of the sampling assembly
X-direction mechanism consists of the horizontal bracket, X-direction guide bar, guide bar
fixer, synchronous belt and pulley, X-direction start position sensor, and motor. There are
9-19
Mechanical System
notches on the horizontal bracket, each of which matches a position detection sensor to
detect the position
Figure 9-16 The structure of the X-direction mechanism of the sampling assembly
For the closed-tube model, there are 5 positions on the X direction for the sample probe,
which are (from back to front): RBC bath position, WBC bath position, DIFF bath position,
autoloading sampling position, closed-tube sampling position.
For the open-vial model, there are 4 positions on the X direction for the sample probe,
which are (from back to front): RBC bath position, WBC bath position, DIFF bath position,
and open-vial sampling position.
9-20
Mechanical System
Figure 9-17 The structure of the Y-direction mechanism of the sampling assembly
The sample probe is driven by the piercing slide. The rotation of the motor is transferred
into the linear motion by the lead screw nut set, which is the Y-direction motion guided by
the guiding axle. The Y-direction start position sensor is installed on the piercing bracket,
and the barrier of the piercing slide is used as the barrier of the sensor, in order to locate
the Y-direction positions of the sample probe.
9.6.2 Maintaining the Assembly

For piercing force deficiency in Y-direction (for closed-tube models, error 0228 is usually
reported), follow the instructions below:
Check if any set screw fixing the Y-direction motor shaft on the lead screw is loose;
Check if any screw in the piercing bracket is loose;
Check if the assembly is well lubricated, and add some lubricant to the parts which have
sliding friction in Y direction (e.g. the ring contact surface of the Y-direction guide bar and the
piercing slide, lead screw nut set, etc.);
Check if the Y-direction sensor or motor is damaged. Replace with a new one if damaged.
For X-direction motion not in place (error 0201 is usually reported), follow the instructions
below:
Check if the press bar of the fixing belt is loose;
Check if the X-direction detection sensor comes into contact with the horizontal bracket in the
whole motion process, which damages the sensors or influence the proper operation of the
sensors;
Check if the X-direction sensor barrier comes into contact with the X-direction start position
sensor;
Check if the assembly is well lubricated, and add some lubricant to the parts which have sliding
friction in X direction (e.g. the ring contact surface of the X-direction guide bar and the piercing
bracket, the contact surface of the horizontal bracket and the rotation stop block, etc.);
9-21
Mechanical System
Check if the X-direction motor is damaged. Replace with a new one if damaged.
The following sections introduce the replacing procedures of motors and sensors (taking
closed-tube model as an example, the replacing procedures of which is similar to that of
the open-vial model).
9.6.2.1Replacing the X-Direction Start Position Sensors
Figure 9-18 Replacing the X-direction start position sensors of the sampling assembly
Remove the 2 M3x8 screws fixing the X-direction start position sensor bracket using a
cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the X-direction start position sensors together
with the bracket from the analyzer. Remove the 2 M3x6 screws fixing the sensors using a
cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the sensors. Install the new sensors in the
reversed order of the steps above.
You can also replace the sensors after removing the sampling assembly.
After the replacement, pull the Y-direction movement module, and check if the X-direction
start position sensor barrier are between the 2 sensors.
9-22
Mechanical System
9.6.2.2Replacing X-Direction Detection Sensor
Figure 9-19 Replacing the X-direction detection sensors of the sampling assembly
Remove the 2 M3x5 screws fixing the X-direction detection sensor bracket using an inner
hexagon spanner, and then remove the X-direction detection sensors together with the
bracket from the analyzer. Remove the 2 M3x6 screws fixing the sensors using a
cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the sensors. Install the new sensors in the
reversed order of the steps above.
After the replacement, pull the X-direction movement module, and check if the fold of the
horizontal bracket (used as the barrier) is between the 2 sensors. Make adjustment if
necessary.
9.6.2.3Replacing Y-Direction Sensor

Remove the 2 M3x6 screws fixing the Y-direction sensors using a cross-headed
screwdriver (as shown in the figure above), and then remove the sensors. Install the new
sensors in the reversed order of the steps above.
9-23
Mechanical System
9.6.2.4Replacing X-Direction Motor
Figure 9-20 Replacing the X-direction motor of the sampling assembly-1

Open the side covers, and then the front cover (as for open-vial models, remove the front
cover after opening the left and right top cover).
Remove the M3x8 screw fixing the sample probe and the fixing plate, and then dismantle
the probe wipe circlip. Remove the probe wipe, sample probe, and the fixing plate from
the sampling assembly. Note that when removing the M3x8 screw, press the M3 nut at the
back of the piercing slide to prevent from falling off; make sure that the tubing is not
damaged when you remove the probe wipe and sample probe.
Unplug the 3 cables which come from the towline and connect to the Y-direction motor,
Y-direction motor, and X-direction detection sensors of the sampling assembly. Remove
the 3 M3x8 screws and 1 M3x5 inner hexagon screw of the frontal protective plate using
the cross-headed screwdriver and inner hexagon spanner, and then remove the frontal
protective plate from the sampling assembly.
Unplug the connector of the cable connecting the X-direction start position sensors of the
sampling assembly, and remove the 4 M4x8 screws fixing the sampling assembly using a
cross-headed screwdriver; hold the whole sampling assembly and take it away from the
analyzer, and then unplug the cable connecting the sampling assembly to the X-direction
motor to remove it.
9-24
Mechanical System
Figure 9-21 Replacing the X-direction motor of the sampling assembly-2
Remove the 4 M3x8 screws (with washers) fixing the X-direction motor with a
cross-headed screwdriver, and then remove the motor with the driving band wheel fixed
on it.
Remove or loosen the 2 M3x5 set screws fixing the driving band wheel with an inner
hexagon spanner, and then remove the driving band wheel from the X-direction motor
shaft.
Install the X-direction motor in the reversed order of the steps above after the replacement.
Pay attention to the notes below while installing:
1. The distance from the driving band wheel to the end of the X-direction motor shaft is
2.5mm;
2. One of the set screws of the driving band wheel should be pressed to the flat of the
X-direction motor shaft;
3. While installing the X-direction motor on the sampling assembly, the cable coming out
of the motor should stand upwards (pointing to the top of the instrument);
4. While installing the X-direction motor on the sampling assembly, adjust the lengthwise
position, making the synchronous belt properly stretched; after the installation of the
sampling assembly, lean it to the left and then right, to see if the Y-direction movement
module can slide down properly;
5. While installing the sampling assembly on the analyzer, make sure all cables and tubes
are well protected.
9.6.2.5Replacing Y-Direction Motor

To replace the Y-direction motor, it is needed to remove the whole sampling assembly
from the analyzer (as instructed in the section above).
9-25
Mechanical System
Figure 9-22 Replacing the Y-direction motor of the sampling assembly-1
As shown in the figure above, remove the 2 M3x10 inner hexagon screws fixing the press
bar of the synchronous belt using an inner hexagon spanner, remove the M4x8 screw
fixing the horizontal guide bar and guide bar fixing pedestal using a cross-headed
screwdriver, remove the 2 M4x20 inner hexagon screws fixing the driven wheel assembly
using an inner hexagon spanner, and then demount the Y-direction movement mechanism
from the sampling assembly.
Figure 9-23 Replacing the Y-direction motor of the sampling assembly-2
As shown in the figure above, remove or loosen the 2 M3x5 set screws fixing the
Y-direction guide bar using an inner hexagon spanner, remove the 4 M3x10 inner hexagon
screws (with spring and flat washers) fixing the Y-direction motor using an inner hexagon
spanner, and then remove the Y-direction motor.
Install the Y-direction motor in the reversed order of the steps above after the replacement.
Pay attention to the notes below while installing:
1. One of the set screws of the Y-direction guide bar should be pressed to the flat of the
Y-direction motor shaft;
2. While installing the Y-direction motor on the Y-direction movement mechanism, the
9-26
Mechanical System
cable coming out of the motor should point at the sensor;

3. For proper installation of the Y-direction motor: secure the 4 M3x10 screws (with spring
and flat washers) fixing the motor first, and then the 2 M3x5 set screws.
9.7 Replace the Syringe Assembly

9.7.1.1Structure of the 100ul syringe assembly
2
8
Figure 9-24 250ul lead screw driving syringe assembly
1 ---Syringe fixing plate 2 --- M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screw

with washer
3 ---100ul Mindray syringe 4 --- Tailored screw
5 --- Baseplate 6 --- M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screw
7 --- Shielding cover 8---Sensor
9 --- Motor
9-27
Mechanical System
9.7.1.2Structure of 250ul lead screw driving syringe assembly

1
10
2
3 9
8
4
7
5
Figure 9-25 250ul lead screw driving syringe assembly
1 --- Motor 2 ---Syringe fixing plate

3 ---250ul (100ul) Mindray syringe 4 --- Tailored screw
5 --- Guide bar 6 --- M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screw
7 --- Lead screw 8---Sensor
10 --- M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screw
9 --- Shielding cover with washer
9.7.1.3Structure of 2.5ml lead screw driving syringe assembly
1
11
10
3
4 9
5
8
Figure 9-26 2.5ml lead screw driving syringe assembly
9-28
Mechanical System
1 ---Syringe fixing plate 2 --- M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screw

with washer
3 ---2.5ml Mindray syringe (silicon rubber) 4 --- 2.5ml Mindray syringe (fluororubber)
5 --- Tailored screw 6 --- Guide bar
7 --- M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screw 8 --- Lead screw
11 --- Motor
9.7.1.4Structure of 10ml lead screw driving syringe assembly
9
1
8
2
7
3
Figure 9-27 10ml lead screw driving syringe assembly
1 ---10ml die sinking syringe 2 --- M3X25 cross-recessed panhead screw

3 --- Tailored screw 4 --- Guide bar
5 --- M3X6 cross-recessed panhead screw 6 --- Lead screw
9 --- Motor

Troubleshooting/Solut
Error Code Error Name Trigger of Error Report
ion
1. Sensors are still blocked Sensor error or
when the syringe is out of excessive motor
the detection area in assembly resistance
Sampling
initialization; which leads to step loss
0x01000301 syringe sensor
2. Sensors are not blocked or operation
error
when the syringe is inside obstruction.
sensor detection area in Low possibility of
initialization; occurrence.
9-29
Mechanical System
ion
3. Should not be at the start 1. Check if the software
position after resetting, but version and hardware
the sensors are blocked. version are correct, and
if the 24V, 12V and 5V
power are proper;
2. Check if the cables of
the sensors and motors
Sampling are well connected and
syringe Sensor not blocked when make sure there is no
0x01000302 aspiration/dispe the syringe is supposed to bad connection;
nsation action be at the start position; 3. Click "Remove Error"
failure 1 to see if it can be
Sampling removed;
syringe Sensor blocked when the 4. Perform self-test at
0x01000303 aspiration/dispe syringe is supposed to be the "Self-test" screen;
nsation action out of the start position 5. When the motor is
failure 2 operating, check if the
Sample syringe When the syringe starts LED indicator of the
aspiration/dispe moving, it is supposed to be corresponding channel
0x01000304 (ASP-M3_LED2;SP-M4
nsation action at the start position, but the
not allowed 1 sensor is not blocked; _LED2, SH-M5_LED2,
Sample syringe When the syringe starts DIL-M6_LED2,
aspiration/dispe moving, it is supposed to be LYSE-M7_LED2) is
0x01000305 flickering. If not, replace
nsation action out of the start position, but
not allowed 2 the sensor is blocked; the driver board;
1. Sensors are still blocked 6. Check if the sensor
when the syringe is out of states are different
the detection area in when it is blocked and
initialization; unblocked;
Sample 7. Find the sensor with
2. Sensors are not blocked
injection error and remove it.
0x01000311 when the syringe is inside
syringe sensor Check if there is dust or
sensor detection area in
error splashed fluid covering
initialization;
3. Should not be at the start the glittering side;
position after resetting, but 8. Wipe the sensor and
the sensors are blocked. mount it back to see if
Sample the error can be
injection removed. If not, replace
Sensor not blocked when with a new one;
syringe
0x01000312 the syringe is supposed to 9. Check if the syringe
aspiration/dispe
be at the start position; assembly is well
nsation action
failure 1 installed; remove the
Sample shielding cover, wipe
injection the lead screw and the
Sensor blocked when the guide bar, and add
syringe
0x01000313 syringe is supposed to be lubricant;
aspiration/dispe
out of the start position 10. If the error still
nsation action
failure 2 exists, replace the
Sample corresponding syringe
injection assembly with a new
Sensor not blocked when one.
syringe
0x01000314 the syringe is supposed to
aspiration/dispe
be at the start position;
nsation action
not allowed 1
Sample
Sensor blocked when the
injection
0x01000315 syringe is supposed to be
syringe
out of the start position
aspiration/dispe
9-30
Mechanical System
ion
nsation action
not allowed 2
1. Sensors are still blocked
when the syringe is out of
the detection area in
initialization;
Sheath fluid 2. Sensors are not blocked
0x01000321 syringe sensor when the syringe is inside
error sensor detection area in
initialization;
3. Should not be at the start
position after resetting, but
the sensors are blocked.
Sheath fluid
syringe Sensor not blocked when
0x01000322 aspiration/dispe the syringe is supposed to
nsation action be at the start position;
failure 1
Sheath fluid
syringe Sensor blocked when the
0x01000323 aspiration/dispe syringe is supposed to be
nsation action out of the start position
failure 2
Sheath fluid
syringe Sensor not blocked when
0x01000324 aspiration/dispe the syringe is supposed to
nsation action be at the start position;
not allowed 1
Sheath fluid
syringe Sensor blocked when the
0x01000325 aspiration/dispe syringe is supposed to be
nsation action out of the start position
not allowed 2
initialization;
Lyse syringe
sensor error
initialization;
Lyse syringe
Sensor not blocked when
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
failure 1
Lyse syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
failure 2
Lyse syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
not allowed 1
9-31
Mechanical System
ion
Lyse syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
not allowed 2
initialization;
Diluent syringe
sensor error
initialization;
Diluent syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
failure 1
Diluent syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
failure 2
Diluent syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
not allowed 1
Diluent syringe
aspiration/dispe
nsation action
not allowed 2
Replace a new Mindray
syringe. The
replacement should be
performed as follows:
10ml syringe remove the tailored
/ /
leakage screw, and then the 4
MX25 screws fixing the
syringe. Unplug the
tubes, and replace the
syringe with a new one.
Replace a new Mindray
syringe. The
replacement should be
performed as follows:
100ul/250ul/2.5
remove the tailored
/ ml syringe /
screw, and then the 4
leakage
MX25 syringing fixing
plate. Unplug the tubes
and remove the syringe
for replacement.
9.8 Debug Screen Introduction

For closed-tube models, if any part of the sampling assembly or the autoloader is replaced, it
is necessary to check and adjust the mechanical positions (Sample Probe Up Position, DIFF
9-32
Mechanical System
Bath Up Position, and closed-tube piercing position) Pincher pinching position

The adjustment can be completed at the "Debug" screen.
Click "Menu→Service→Debug" to enter the "Debug" screen.
Debug screen of closed-tube models

Note 1: after clicking "Start", the assembly should be at the default position, not the adjusted
position; after clicking "Start", the button changes into "Save". The adjustment only takes effect
if you click "Save" after the adjustment. The "Check" button is used to simulate the actions in
normal sample analysis process. Remember to remove the fixtures as instructed.
Note 2: Click the "Coarse Adjust" (bottom left) button to switch to "Fine Adjust", and click again
to switch back. When the button shows "Coarse Adjust", it means the current state of motor
adjustment is "Fine Adjust", when the motor moves 2 steps by one click; when the button
shows "Fine Adjust", it means the current state of motor adjustment is "Coarse Adjust", when
the motor moves 20 steps by one click
Note 3: in the horizontal movement of the sampling assembly, the stride of one step is 0.16mm;
in vertical movement, 0.04mm.
9.9 Adjusting the Position of the Sample Probe

The adjustment of sample probe positions include the adjustment of:
 Sample probe up position (probe wipe position)
9-33
Mechanical System
 DIFF bath up position

 Autoloading piercing position
 Closed-tube piercing position
Note: the "Sample Probe Up Position" variation is included in the formula of autoloading and
closed-tube piercing position step calculation. Therefore, sample probe up position adjustment
is of the first priority; if you adjust the autoloading/closed-tube piercing position first, further
adjustment is needed after the sample probe up position adjustment, since the change of the
sample probe up position will lead to the change of the autoloading and closed-tube piercing
positions.
Tools needed for the adjustment include:
 Cross-headed screwdriver
 Ruler
 Fitting pin or sample probe up position fixture
9.9.1 Sample Probe Up Position Adjustment

Adjustment: select "Sample Probe Position →Sample Probe Up Position", and then click
"Start". Use the "Up" and "Down" buttons to adjust the sample probe tip to be level with the
bottom surface of the probe wipe.
Check: click "Save", and then "Check". Use the sample probe wipe up position fixture to check
the adjusted position as instructed by the figures below:
If the requirements are not met, adjust again using the "Up" and "Down" buttons.
If there is no fixture, use a ruler and the fitting pin. For open-vial models, it is required that the
sample probe is inside the probe wipe, and the probe tip is 5.3±0.2mm up from the bottom of
the probe wipe; for closed-tube models, the probe tip should be 7.2±0.2mm up from the bottom
of the probe wipe.
9.9.2 DIFF Bath Up Position Adjustment

Select "Sample Probe Position →Sample Probe Up Position", and then click "Check" to make
the sample probe inside the DIFF bath. Check if the distance from the center of the sample
probe to the inner surface of the DIFF bath (the side close to the frontal plate) is about 2.5mm.
If not, click "Start" in the "Sample Probe Position →Sample Probe Up Position" area, and then
use the "Forward" and "Backward" buttons to adjust the sampling position.
When the adjustment finishes, click "Save", and then "Check", to confirm the DIFF bath
9-34
Mechanical System
sampling position.
Exit the "Debug screen" and run a blank count cycle. Make sure that the sample probe do not
touch the bath during DIFF bath mixing, WBC bath Mixing, and RBC bath mixing.
9.9.3 Autoloading Piercing Position Adjustment

 Autoloader lengthwise and broadwise adjustment (mechanical method)
 Sample probe lengthwise adjustment (software method)
 Sample probe vertical adjustment (software method)
Where the first 2 steps influence the centering for piercing (deviated piercing), and Step 3
influences the minimum aspiration volume.
Detailed procedures are as follows:
1)Take a tube rack, and place a 12X75 evacuated blood collection tube in the rack. Feed the
tube rack until the collection tube is at the autoloading piercing position, and the 2 tube rack
pinch roller seize the rack.
2)At the "Debug" screen of the PC software, click the "Check" button of the "AL Piercing
Position" area, and the sample probe start piercing the collection tube cap.
Check if the pierced position is at the center of the tube cap (you can cover the tube cap with
adhesive tape for easier check) without obvious deviation. If it does not meet the requirement,
click "Return", and the sample probe will withdraw from the tube. Adjust as instructed below:
① For deviation to left or right, remove the 3 screws fixing the autoloader, and make the
autoloader appressed to the front plate. Move the autoloader to left/right, and secure the
screws after the adjustment.
Left screw Middle screw Right screw
② For deviation to front or back, check if the autoloader is appressed to the front plate
(mechanical method), and adjust the position of the sample probe using the "Forward" and
"Backward" buttons at the "Debug" screen.
③ After the adjustment, click "Check" to check if the piercing position is at the center.
3)Remove the tube cap of the tube and put it back into the tube rack. At the "Debug" screen of
the PC software, click the "Check" button of the "AL Piercing Position" area, and the sample
probe start aspirating from the collection tube. Put the collection tube upward manually, and
make the probe tip touch the bottom of the tube. Check if the tube is 3-5mm higher (you can
mark on the exterior wall of the tube)
9-35
Mechanical System
9.9.4 Closed-Tube Piercing Position Adjustment

 Sample compartment broadwise and lengthwise adjustment (mechanical method)
 Sample probe lengthwise adjustment (software method)
 Sample probe vertical adjustment (software method)
Where the first 2 steps influence the centering for piercing (deviated piercing), and Step 3
influences the minimum aspiration volume.
Place a 12X75 evacuated blood collection tube into the assorted 13X75 adapter.
At the "Debug" screen of the PC software, click the "Check" button of the "CT Piercing
Position" area, and the sample probe start piercing the cap of the collection tube in the
adapter.
Check if the pierced position is at the center of the tube cap (you can cover the tube cap with
adhesive tape for easier check) without obvious deviation. If it does not meet the requirement,
click "Return", and the sample probe will withdraw from the tube. Adjust as instructed below:
① For deviation to left or right, remove the 3 screws fixing the sample compartment, and
check if the distance between the center of the compartment and the front plate is 117.5mm,
move the compartment to left/right, and secure the screws after the adjustment
2 screws on
1 screw
the right
on the left
② For deviation to front or back, check if the distance between the center of the compartment
and the front plate is 117.5mm, and adjust the position of the sample probe using the
"Forward" and "Backward" buttons at the "Debug" screen.
③ After the adjustment, click "Check" to check if the piercing position is at the center.
Remove the tube cap of the tube and put it back into the adapter. At the "Debug" screen of the
PC software, click the "Check" button of the "CT Piercing Position" area, and the sample probe
start aspirating from the collection tube. Put the collection tube upward manually, and make the
probe tip touch the bottom of the tube. Check if the tube is 3-5mm higher (you can mark on the
exterior wall of the tube)
9.10 Adjusting the Clamp Position

1. After remove and installation of the mixing assembly, ensure that the mixing assembly is
installed in position.
9-36
Mechanical System
 Mixing assembly installation and adjustment (mechanical)

 Manipulator position adjustment (software: left/right, front/back)
2. After removing and installing the tube clamp, ensure that the mixing assembly is installed in
position.
 Clamp position adjustment (mechanical)
 Clamp position adjustment (software: left/right, front/back)

1)Get one tube rack, and transport it manually until the 2 tube rack pinch roller seize the rack.
2)At the "Debug" screen of the PC software, select "Mix Mechanism", and then click
"Initialization→X Forward". The manipulator moves out to the be above the tube rack. Check
visually that the clamp is aligned with the center of the tube position.
3)If the left/right position is incorrect, loosen the 4 M4X8 cross-recessed panhead screws, and
then move the mixing assembly to left/right until the manipulator is aligned with the center of
the tube position, and then secure the screws.
4 M4X8 cross-
recessed panhead
screws
Pin
Check visually that the

pincher is aligned with
the center of the tube
Note 1: prevent from deformation while moving the mixing assembly, and adjust the pin in the
assembly if necessary.
Note 2: after the screws are secured, the position of the mixing assembly may change, and
you need to check the clamp position again.
4)If the front/back position is incorrect

a) For the new tube clamp (115-064325-00), configuring the new rotation axis (longer, no
9-37
Mechanical System
threaded hole in the front) and the old one (shorter, a threaded hole in the front, and two
sides of it are made flat) will use the same adjustment method. Click the “Up” button in the
“Manipulator” section, loosen the two M3X10 stainless-steel inner hexagon screws used
to fix the tube clamp, then move the clamp forward/backward until the manipulator is
aligned with the center of the tube position, and then secure the screws.
Loosen the 2 inner
The old rotation
hexagon screws.
axis, a threaded
The new rotation
hole in the front,
axis, no threaded
and two sides of it
hole in the front.
are made flat.
b) For the old tube clamp (115-006303-00) and old rotation axis, use a retaining screw on the
top of the old tube clamp and a M3X10 stainless-steel inner hexagon screw in the front of
the rotation axis to fix them together. And the manipulator location can’t be adjusted
forward or backward.
An inner
hexagon screw
and a retaining
screw
c) Note: the old tube clamp can’t be installed on the new rotation axis. Because the new
rotation axis is fixed with only one retaining screw, then the old tube clamp can’t be locked
tightly.
9-38
Mechanical System
5)Select "X Backward", and place a 12X75 tube into the tube position the clamp aims at.
Check the relative state of the tube after it is placed back using the X direction, Z direction, and
mix buttons. It is required there should be no interference in the tube pinching and mixing
processes, and all actions should be completed smoothly.
No interference, and
all actions are
completed smoothly. If
the manipulator
position is not correct,
adjust using the
buttons in the
"Manipulator Position"
area.
If the requirement is not met, adjust the manipulator position using the buttons in the
"Manipulator Position" area. After the adjustment, go back to the "Autoloader" screen and
check.
Ensure that:
 The height of the underside of the tube fixing plate over the tube clamp is slightly lower than
the vertical back plate for the tube.
 The underside of the tube clamp is at least 1.5 mm higher than the topside of the tube rack.
Tube fixing plate over the Vertical back plate
tube clamp for the tube
≥1.5mm
9-39
Mechanical System
9.11 Adjusting Built-in Barcode Scanner

1) Get one tube rack, and transport it manually until the 2 the 2 tube rack pinch roller seize the
rack.
2) In the "Built-in Barcode Scanner" area of the "Debug" screen, click "Open", and the barcode
scanner beams.
3)Place a piece of paper right before the tube rack, and observe the reflection of the beam on
the paper. The beam should be aligned with the center of the tube position notch.
If the requirement is not met, loosen the 2 M3X8 panhead screws, and manually adjust the
position of the beam. After the adjustment is successful, re-secure the screws. After the screws
are secured, re-check the position of the beam.
Loosen the
2 screws to
adjust the
position of
the built-in
barcode
scanner.
9-40
Mechanical System
9.12 HGB Assembly Replacement

Table 9-1 Difference between old and new circuit boards
Circuit board figure/PN Compatible HGB assembly Dial method Applicable

version
Old Old HGB assembly Applicable
circuit (applicable to version to version
board before EJ295F) before
801-3102-00050-00 HGB EJ295F
Unit(BC-5380)
801-3102-00012-00 WBC
bath assembly
PN：051-000982-00
New New HGB assembly with Applicable
circuit “new 新 ” label (applicable to EJ295F
board to EJ295F and later version) and later
version
New label
location
PN：051-000982-01
115-065236-00 HGB
Assembly (New LED)
115-065237-00 WBC
Dial switch + label Assembly(New LED)
Old HGB assembly
(applicable to version
before EJ295F)
801-3102-00050-00 HGB
Unit(BC-5380)
801-3102-00012-00 WBC
bath assembly
9.12.1 Maintenance Protocol

9.12.1.1Error Phenomenon
After replacing the HGB assembly, the HGB blank voltage can’t reach the required range.
9.12.1.2Solution
Maintenance scenario 1: new circuit board + new HGB assembly
1. Replace a new HGB circuit board.
2. Adjust the dial switch on the circuit board according to the following method.
9-41
Mechanical System
3. Verify whether the adjustment has achieved satisfactory results referring to “Verification
after Replacement and Adjustment (Applicable to Maintenance Scenario 1&2)”.
Maintenance scenario 2: new circuit board + old HGB assembly

1. Replace a new HGB circuit board.
2. Adjust the dial switch on the circuit board according to the following method.
3. Verify whether the adjustment has achieved satisfactory results referring to “Verification
after Replacement and Adjustment (Applicable to Maintenance Scenario 1&2)”.
Maintenance scenario 3: old circuit board + old HGB assembly

The HGB circuit can’t be adjusted by adjusting dial switch when the old HGB circuit
board is used. Adjust it on the “Gain Setup” screen if necessary.
If you cannot adjust the HGB circuit to the normal level on the “Gain Setup” screen, replace a
new circuit board, then adjust the circuit according to the “Maintenance scenario 2”.
9.12.1.3Verification after Replacement and Adjustment (Applicable to

Maintenance Scenario 1&2)
Login to the analyzer software using the service account, go to “Gain Setup” screen, check
whether the HGB blank voltage reaches the required range. If not, adjust the HGB gain
according to the following flowchart.
Adjust the HGB gain using

service account
YES Whether the HGB blank

voltage reaches the
required range
NO
Adjust the HGB blank voltage

according to the dial method in
the above table
Finish
9-42
P/N: 046-000142-00(8.0)

Manual de Serviço BC-5380

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Serviço BC-5380

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BC-5380 / BC-5180

Auto Hematology Analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other

, , are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this

 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

This warranty shall not extend to:

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or

 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

Company Name: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

E-mail Address: service@mindray.com

Tel: +86 755 81888998

Fax: +86 755 26582680

EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)

Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany

1 Using This Manual..................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Scope ...................................................................................................................... 1-1

2 Product Specification ............................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Equipment Name ..................................................................................................... 2-1

3 Software System ....................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 3-1

4 Main Parameters Description................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Parameter Source ................................................................................................... 4-1

5 Error Information of the Analyzer ............................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Error Code ............................................................................................................... 5-1

6 Fluidic System ........................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Analysis Flow ........................................................................................................... 6-1

7 Optical System .......................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Overview of Optical System Principle ..................................................................... 7-1

8 Hardware System ...................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 8-1

9 Mechanical System ................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Analyzer Structure ................................................................................................... 9-1

9.8 Debug Screen Introduction .................................................................................... 9-32

 Be sure to operate and service the analyzer strictly as instructed in this

 Comprehensive knowledge of circuit and fluidics;

 Comprehensive knowledge of reagents;

 Comprehensive knowledge of controls;

 Comprehensive knowledge of troubleshooting;

 Mastering the way to operate this analyzer;

 Mastering the way to operate this analyzer;

 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope;

 Reading pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology.

1.3 Conventions Used in This Manual

To press the desired item lightly with your finger; or to left-CLICK

ENTER the pop-up keyboard to enter the desired characters or digits; or

to scan the number by using the bar-code scanner.

When you read … It means …

[←][→][Home][End], and then delete the character after the

cursor by pressing [Del], or delete the character before the cursor

by pressing [BackSpace] ([←] on the upper right part of the soft

to CLICK the arrow buttons at the ends of the scroll bar; or to

pull-down list CLICK the desired item; or to press the keys

[ENTER] to select the desired item.

You will find the following symbols in this manual.

When you see… Then…

RBC . 1012/L PLT **** 109/L

. 106/uL **** 103/uL

* g/L ** g/L